JP2020072921A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a performance.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine, a movable performance unit is provided in a back side of a game board 60a. The movable performance unit includes a first decoration device and a second decoration device, and the decoration devices include a linking mechanism each. The respective decoration devices include a body part, and a first link part and a second link part provided movably relative to the body part. In the first decoration device, the second link part includes a movement performance part 243b, and the movement performance part 243b can travel from a retraction position to a performance position PA2 by rotation of the respective link parts. In the second decoration device 233, the second link part includes a rotation performance part 403b, and the rotation performance part 403b can travel from a retraction position to a performance position PB2 by rotation of the respective link parts.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern when a player enters a ball entering part provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this pattern display device. By doing this, there is a game in which the degree of attention to the game is improved.

  Further, for example, by providing a production means including a light emitting portion and a movable body around the display screen, and by providing a predetermined correspondence between the production by the variable display of the design and the production by the production means, further attention is paid. An improved game machine has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2002-78904, A

  However, there is room for improvement in order to improve the degree of attention to the effect of the effect means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately improving the degree of attention to the effect.

The present invention is
A first link part and a second link part are connected to the main body part, and a linking mechanism including the first link part and the second link part allows the movement effecting part to be visually recognized from the front of the game machine and the effect position. A gaming machine configured to move from a production position to a retracted position,
When the first link unit is operated, it is possible to move the movement rendering unit from one of the rendering position and the retracted position toward the other of the rendering position and the retracted position. When the 2 link unit is operated, it is possible to move the movement rendering unit from one of the rendering position and the retracted position toward the other of the rendering position and the retracted position,
A first drive unit for operating the first link unit;
A second drive unit for operating the second link unit;
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to an effect.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in the present embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the left front. It is a front view of a movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a 1st decoration device. It is a schematic front view of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of the 1st link part and 2nd link part of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main-body part of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is an operation diagram when the first decoration device shifts from the retracted state to the effect state. It is an operation diagram when the first decoration device shifts from the effect state to the retracted state. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd link part of the 1st decoration device. It is a figure for demonstrating the deformation | transformation of the movement production part of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd decoration device. It is a schematic front view of a 2nd decoration apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of a 2nd link part. It is an exploded perspective view of a main part. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a main-body part. It is an operation diagram when the second decoration device shifts from the effect state to the retracted state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for win / win lottery and the like. It is a flow chart which shows the production processing performed with a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the operation process of the 2nd decoration apparatus performed by a display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10 and may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main portion 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable and closable state. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and is further connected to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. A support mechanism is constituted by the upper support metal fitting 17 and the lower support metal fitting 18, and the main body 12 of the gaming machine rotates the left side in a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 by the support mechanism. The right side of the pachinko machine can be rotated forward with respect to the right side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. And a unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main body 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be turned forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. A back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side in front view ( (See FIG. 3).

<Front door frame 14>
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center portion of the frame body 20 so that almost all of a game area PE described later can be visually recognized, and the window portion 21 is formed by a glass unit 22. It is closed from the rear side of the front door frame 14.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition part that partitions the holding region of the glass panel 23 into front and rear parts, and both glass panels 23 face each other with the partition part in between. That is, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the gaming areas PE are doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  In addition, both glass panels 23 do not necessarily need to be unitized using the glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached to the frame body 20 individually. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination portion 26 having a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window portion 21. In the annular illumination portion 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. Further, at the center of the annular illumination portion 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, there is provided an error display lamp portion 27 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. A ball lamp unit 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to the gaming state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 which bulge toward the front side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 33.

  On the right side of the lower bulging portion 32, a game ball launching handle 41 is provided so as to project to the front side. By operating the game ball launching handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launching mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed in an upper corner portion thereof, and the receiving portion is partitioned into left and right by a partition wall, so that an entrance of the front door side upper plate passage is formed. The portion and the entrance portion of the lower door passage on the front door side are partitioned and formed. The game ball entering the front door side upper plate passage is guided to the upper plate 33, and the game ball entering the front door side lower plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

  Protruding shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side on the back surface. These projection shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, a plurality of hook metal fittings 49 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the up-down direction on the front end side of the front door frame 14 on the rotating front side. These hook fittings 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

<Inner frame 13>
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the inner frame base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof), and the inner frame base 50 is placed on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. Becomes

  Support fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the front surface of the inner frame base 50 on the rotation base end side. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shafts of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the hook fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front end side of the front surface of the inner frame base 50. In this pachinko machine 10, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged so as to be hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fitting 49 is locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Further, the locking device 55 has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 57 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11 to lock the gaming machine main portion 12 in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the inner frame base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured such that when the key is turned counterclockwise, the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

  A game board housing portion 53 for housing the game board unit 60 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base 50. The game board accommodating portion 53 is a concave portion recessed to the rear of the game machine according to the outer shape of the game board unit 60, and the game board unit 60 is manually locked while being fitted in the game board accommodating portion 53 from the front of the game machine. It is fixed by the mechanism. A substantially rectangular window hole 54 is formed in the bottom of the game board housing portion 53, and the rear surface configuration of the game board unit 60 (a rear block 60b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 54. ing. It should be noted that the window 54 is in a state in which almost the entire area is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 60 mounted on the inner frame base 50.

<Game board unit 60>
The game board unit 60 is provided with a game board 60a formed mainly of a plate material made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and provided on the back side of the game board 60a, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable type) described later. (The effect mechanism, the decorative member capable of emitting light, etc.) is integrated with the back block 60b mounted on the block base 136, and the front portion of the back block 60b is visible through the game board 60a.

  On the front surface of the game board 60a, the above-mentioned game area PE in which the game balls flow down is formed. As described above, the game area PE is covered by the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 60a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same as the game area PE. It is arranged so that it is not lined up in front and behind in some places. Thereby, the ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. The game board 60a (specifically, the plate body) is not limited to the synthetic resin, and can be made of wood.

  Hereinafter, the game board unit 60 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 60a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 5, and 6. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 60, FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the game board unit 60 seen from the right front side, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the game board unit 60 seen from the left front side. 5 and 6, the structure visible through the game board 60a is also indicated by a two-dot chain line, which is close to the appearance when the game board unit 60 is actually viewed.

  As shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 6, the game board 60a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-back direction). A general winning opening 61, a variable winning device 64, actuating openings 62, 63, a through gate 65, etc. are arranged in each opening. When gaming balls enter the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 64, and the operation openings 62, 63, the gaming balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective ball-in, and the detection results are obtained. Based on, a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player. In addition, an out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60a, and game balls that have not entered the various ball-in parts are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball entering the outlet 68 from the game ball entering, the game ball entering the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 64, and the operating openings 62 and 63 is also referred to as a "winning". Express.

  Further, in the game board 60a, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged. The flow paths of the game balls are differentiated by various configurations such as these nails and windmills, and the above-mentioned general winning openings 61 and the like are adjusted so that a prize is generated with an appropriate probability.

  A central opening 72 is formed in the center of the game board 60a, and a transparent opening cover (not shown) is attached so as to cover the central opening 72 from the back side of the game board 60a. Behind the central opening 72, the variable display unit 67 and the like belonging to the back block 60b are located, and the variable display unit 67 and the like can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (opening cover). ..

  By the way, the game board 60a has an opaque sheet material laminated on the transparent plate material. This sheet material is attached to the front plate surface of the transparent plate material, and blocks the line of sight of the game board 60a toward the back surface. Therefore, the range that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine in the back block 60b is limited to the portion exposed to the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 of the gaming board 60a.

  In the game board 60a, the operation openings 62 and 63, the through gate 65, and the like are arranged around the central opening 72. The working ports 62 and 63 are composed of an upper working port 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a lower working port 63 disposed immediately below the upper working port 62, and particularly the lower working port. The (lottery trigger entry ball portion) 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 serving as an opening / closing entry assistance device (entry assistance means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 71 has a pair of left and right movable pieces and a solenoid-type drive portion that drives the movable pieces, and is in an open state (auxiliary state) in which the ball can enter or easily enter the lower working port 63. It is possible to switch to a closed state (non-auxiliary state) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball.

  The through gate 65 is arranged on the upstream side (more specifically, to the side of the variable display unit 67) of the lower working opening 63, and the winning is achieved by a lottery triggered by the passage of the gaming ball through the through gate 65. In this case, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  When a ball enters the upper working port 62, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower working port 63, four game balls are paid out. However, the payout number of gaming balls is not limited to the above. However, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower working port 63 with respect to the upper working port 62, it is preferable to set the number of payouts of the lower working port 63 larger than the number of payouts of the upper working port 62.

  The variable winning device (special ball device or special ball means) 64 is formed with a big winning opening leading to the back side of the game board 60a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing means) for opening and closing the big winning opening. An opening and closing door is provided. The open / close door can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state) in which the game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which the game ball cannot or is difficult. In addition, the door is connected to a variable winning a prize drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game board 60a, and the door is normally kept in a closed state and opened / closed in an internal lottery. When you win the transition to the execution mode (opening and closing execution state) (big hit: when you win the transition to the special gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), you can switch to the open state There is.

  Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when the jackpot is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 64 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) are set as an upper limit. The opening / closing door is set to be repeatedly opened.

  Here, the variable display unit 67 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays (variable display) the symbols triggered by winning in the operation openings 62 and 63. The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and its display content is controlled by a display control device 170 (see FIG. 23) described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed by scrolling in the left-right direction. When the jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset activated line, and the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered. The symbol display device 75 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

  A center frame 77 is provided on the game board 60a so as to surround the central opening 72. The center frame 77 is fixed to the game board 60a (specifically, a plate body) from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 77 stands up from the front surface of the game board 60a. The gap between 77 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 77) on the right side. It is roughly divided into routes that detour from and routes that detour from the left.

  On the upper surface of the frame portion that constitutes the lower portion of the center frame 77, a stage portion on which a game ball can roll to the left and right is formed. The game balls that have flowed in from the inflow ports formed on the left and right left frame portions of the center frame 77 are discharged onto the stage portion through the warp passages that are also formed on the center frame 77. The stage part is configured so that the game ball that reaches the stage part is relatively easy to flow into the upper working opening 62, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage part is improved. Contribute to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the central opening 72 is covered by the transparent opening cover as described above, so that the game ball reaching the stage part does not move to the back block 60b (variable display unit 67) side. It is regulated.

  The operation ports 62 and 63 are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 72 (variable display unit 67). Since it is possible to shift to the special game state with the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to enter the operating ports 62 and 63 and grasps whether to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that the symbol display device 75 is focused on. Providing the operation ports 62 and 63 near the variable display unit 67 is a device for concentrating the parts the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 67.

  A game area partitioning member 99 that partitions and forms a game area PE together with a guide rail 100 described below is provided at the right end portion (rotating front end portion of the game board unit 60 described below) of the game board 60a. The game area partitioning member 99 is provided with a stopper member against which the game balls flying along the main display unit 81 and the guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down in the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the game ball that collides.

  Here, the main display unit 81 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 81 is embedded in the game area partitioning member 99, and a part of the main display unit 81 is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display portion for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

  The main display unit is for the lower working port that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the upper working port 62, and the right working port that displays the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 63. And a display section. In the lower working port display unit, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 62 is performed. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 62 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the lower working opening display unit, and the predetermined result is set as the stop result. After the picture is displayed, the opening / closing execution mode is entered.

  In the lower working opening display portion, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the lower working opening 63 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working opening 63 is performed. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the lower working opening 63 is the winning result corresponding to the big hit, the variable display is stopped on the right working opening display portion, and the predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result. After that, the opening / closing execution mode is entered according to the result.

  Here, based on the winning in any one of the operating ports 62, 63, the variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display unit, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variable display is stopped until the game. It is equivalent to one time. However, one game play is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning is generated in any of the operation ports 62 and 63, the single play area is generated. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the variable display is stopped once with a predetermined stop result being displayed once in the game. It is also possible to

  In addition to the above-mentioned display parts, the main display part 81 of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through-gate display part for displaying a lottery result based on a winning of the through-gate 65. In the display section for the through gate, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through gate 65 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 65 is clearly shown as the stop result of the variable display. To be done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through-gate 65 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric power open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through-gate display unit and a variable display is displayed. After it is stopped, it shifts to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 71 provided in the lower operation port 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 65 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the held display number is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 81. An on-hold number display is provided.

  The main display unit described in detail above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, the visibility is secured.

  The structure of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. Below the mounting region of the game board 60a in the inner frame base 50, the game is directed toward the game region PE based on the operation of the game ball firing handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 for launching a ball is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 is a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base 50 to thereby fix the inner frame base. It is integrated with 50.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60a. A ball stopper that keeps the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described shooting standby position is provided at a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / firing control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is on the game board 60a side, specifically, the game. It is struck toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60a.

  The guide rail 100 partitions the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and one guide passage 103 is defined by these both rails 101 and 102. Has been formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion opened to the tip side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112 and an outlet portion located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the operation amount of the game ball firing handle 41, it is possible to hit the game ball into a region on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game region PE or a region on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game region PE. It is possible.

  In addition, in the game board 60a, on the front side of the exit portion, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a reversion preventing member 106 for preventing reversion of the game ball reaching the game area PE into the guide passage 103 is attached. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball that has reached the game area PE ahead of time hinders the subsequent game ball from being launched.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower end edge of the game board 60a. In other words, the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced left and right in the vicinity of the lower edge of the game board 60a. Thereby, both the rails 100 and 112 are brought close to the lower end edge of the game board 60a, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return as foul balls in the guide passage 103, those foul balls must enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. Becomes The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower dish 34 shown in FIG. As a result, interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be subsequently launched is suppressed.

  In the inner frame base 50, a through hole that penetrates the inner frame base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14), and a passage is formed in this through hole. The forming member 121 is provided. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body side upper tray passage and a main body side lower tray passage. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage. A front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage.

  Below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base 50, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end of the opening / closing member 124, and further has a biasing member that biases the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage to a front position. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, closing the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in the state where the game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, it is possible to prevent the stored balls from spilling. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage and the front door side upper tray passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage communicate with each other.

  Next, a back surface configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base 50 and the game board unit 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Bearing metal fittings 132 are vertically arranged side by side on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the inner frame base 50. The bearing fittings 132 are formed with bearing portions vertically separated from each other, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base 50, a plurality of fixing levers for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base 50 in a closed state are provided.

  As described above, a window hole 54 is formed in the bottom portion of the game board accommodating portion 53 of the inner frame base 50, the window hole 54 penetrating in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and being open to the back side of the inner frame base 50. The window 54 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 60 housed in the game board housing portion 53. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 60 (back block 60b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 54. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 60 will be described.

  Further, the back block 60b attached to the back surface of the game board 60a has a block base 136 having a substantially box shape opened to the game board 60a side, and this block base 136 is fixed to the back surface of the game board 60a. As a result, the game board 60a and the back block 60b are integrated.

  The front side of the block base 136 is an arrangement area of a movable effect mechanism (for example, a movable effect unit 230 described later), a decorative member capable of emitting light, and the like, and a rear side thereof is a control device for controlling these various configurations. And the variable display unit 67 (symbol display device 75) are arranged areas.

  More specifically, a part of the block base 136 is projected to the back side of the inner frame base 50, and the above-described symbol display device 75 and the symbol display device 75 are driven with respect to the projected portion. A display control device 170 is attached. The symbol display device 75 and the display control device 170 are arranged in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base 50) so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device 170 is on the rear side. Further, on the back surface of the block base 136, a notification / effect control device 143 is mounted so as to be located behind the display control device 170.

  The notification / effect control device 143 includes an notification / effect control board that controls voice output and lamp display, and control of the display control device 170 in accordance with an instruction from a main controller described later. It is housed in a substrate box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  Below the notification / production control device 143, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the block base 136 from the rear side. The main controller unit 160 has a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 60 (specifically, the back block 60b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main controller 162 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 composed of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected in a non-openable manner by a sealing portion as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long side part of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for the sealing process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover can be separated by inserting the locking claws into the long holes forming the sealing part. It is designed so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing unit prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of sealing portions. When the board box 163 is unsealed, for example, when the stored main control board is defective or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion where the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing portion are connected to each other. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing portion. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 163 that an illegal opening has been made.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the board box 163 so as to project to the side. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupling pieces. Be seen.

  In the portion of the front surface of the block base 136 facing the lower rear surface of the game board 60a, the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 64, the operation openings 62, 63 corresponding to the opening of the game board and on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) is formed at one location. As a result, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 61 and the like are all collected under the game board unit 60 via the collection passage. That is, the block base 136 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have won the various winning openings.

  A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 60, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 60 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. The outlet 68 is also connected to the discharge passage in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are discharged into the discharge passage through the outlet 68.

  In addition, the block base 136 constituting the back block 60b, as a detection sensor for each of the above-described ball winning portion, a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting a game ball winning the general winning opening 61, and a variable winning device. A detection sensor for a variable winning device that detects a game ball that has won a prize in 64 and a detection sensor for an operating port that detects a game ball that has entered the operating ports 62 and 63 are mounted, and a prize detection mechanism is provided by these various detection sensors. Is configured. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and the detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

<Back pack unit 15>
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism section 202, a discharge passage board, and a controller assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 protruding rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Have and. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  An external terminal board 213 is provided on the upper right portion of the base portion 211. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the hooking pins are inserted into the bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener for fastening to a hole to be fastened provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the turning front end of the base portion 211, and the fastener is fitted into the hole to be fastened. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  A payout mechanism section 202 is arranged in the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opening upward, and the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 221. It Below the tank 221, a tank rail that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game spheres paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game sphere distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is on the main body side described above. The upper plate 33 is formed so as to communicate with the upper plate 33 through the upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the lower plate 34 through the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage. ..

  As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on a surface facing the control device gathering unit 204, and an opening portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device gathering unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned recovery passage and the like pass to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. Is discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the dispensing control device 181 and the power supply / launching control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects outside the board box. For example, when a state return switch is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing device 222 occurs, the ball clogging can be eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 has a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined power supply required by various control devices and the like, and a player shoots a game ball. The control of the launch of the game ball is performed in accordance with the operation of the handle 41. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erasing switch. The pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, the status of the power failure can be retained, and when the power is restored, the status of the power failure can be restored. Is becoming Therefore, when the power is shut off in a normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the power is shut off is stored, but when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a rear block 60b in which various movable effect devices (hereinafter referred to as movable effect devices) and decorative members that emit light are mounted behind the transparent game board 60a. Are provided so that the effect devices and the like can be visually confirmed through the game board 60a.

  In particular, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6 (perspective view of the game board unit 60), a part of the back block 60b is located behind the game area PE. This makes it possible to utilize the back of the game area PE in which the game balls flow down as an execution area for various game effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the appearance of the game board unit 60 and the widening of the effect execution area, as compared with a game machine equipped with a conventionally known wooden game board.

  Further, by providing the back block 60b behind the game board 60a, it is possible to set the space between the variable display unit 67 and the game board 60a as the installation area of the movable effect device, which is well known in the related art. Compared with the configuration described above, it is easy to increase the size of the movable effect device and diversify the operation. In the present embodiment, the movable effect device has a characteristic configuration.

  The game board 60a is mainly provided with a function of forming an area (game area PE) where the game balls flow down. Here, when it is attempted to improve the various decoration functions and effect functions related to the game and secure the game area PE at the same time, the game area PE is inevitably pressed by giving priority to the former. In this respect, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the minimum necessary configuration for securing the flow path of the game ball, securing the inlet, etc. is arranged on the front surface of the game board 60a, and the addition for production and decoration is added. By moving the conventional configuration to the back block 60b side, it is avoided that the game area PE is pressed. That is, it is possible to secure the game area PE as wide as possible within the limited range of the front surface of the game board 60a (specifically, the plate body).

  As described above, the back block 60b has the block base 136 as a pedestal on which various effect devices such as the variable display unit 67 and various control devices such as the notification / effect control device 143 are mounted.

  The block base 136 is formed by integrally molding a flat plate-shaped facing portion 137 facing the back surface of the game board 60a and a base bulging portion 138 bulging backward from the facing portion 137 with a transparent synthetic resin material. The outer shape of the game board 60a is substantially the same as that of the game board 60a (specifically, the vertical width is slightly smaller).

  The base bulging portion 138 has a box shape that is open to the front (game board 60a side), and the facing portion 137 is configured by a mounting flange formed along the opening edge thereof. The game board 60a and the back block 60b are integrated into one unit by being screwed to the game board 60a while the facing portion 137 is in contact with the back surface of the game board 60a (see FIG. 3).

  An open portion is formed at the bottom of the base bulging portion 138 so as to penetrate in the front-back direction, that is, so as to communicate with the central opening 72 of the game board 60a. The variable display unit 67 is attached to the rear surface of the base bulging portion 138 so as to close the opening, and the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is exposed to the front side of the gaming machine through the opening. .. In addition, the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 170 are laminated on the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) so that the latter is the front side and the former is the rear side, and further below it. Considering that the main control device 162 is attached to the base bulging portion 138, the rear portion of the bulging portion functions as an attaching portion for attaching various electrical configurations that do not affect the appearance. ..

<Movable production unit 230>
The back block 60b has a movable effect unit 230 that operates to enhance effect. The movable effect unit 230 is disposed between the block base 136 and the game board 60a, and extends along the peripheral edge of the central opening 72 and the display screen 75a on the back side of the game board 60a. In this case, the movable effect unit 230 is blocked by the game board 60a from the front of the game machine to be difficult to see, and does not block the line of sight from the front of the game machine to the display screen 75a.

  The movable effect unit 230 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. 7 is a front view of the movable effect unit 230, and FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the movable effect unit 230.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the movable effect unit 230 includes a substantially rectangular frame-shaped unit body 231, and a first decoration device 232 and a second decoration device 233 attached to the unit body 231. .. The unit main body 231 has a pair of vertical frame portions 231a extending in the vertical direction and a pair of horizontal frame portions 231b connecting the vertical frame portions 231a, and among the pair of vertical frame portions 231a. The first decoration device 232 is attached to one side, and the second decoration device 233 is attached to the other side. For example, the first decoration device 232 is attached to the vertical frame portion 231a on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the second decoration device 233 is attached to the vertical frame portion 231a on the left side. The first decoration device 232 corresponds to a link device, and the second decoration device 233 corresponds to a rendering device.

  The unit main body 231 has a frame opening 231c surrounded by each vertical frame portion 231a and each horizontal frame portion 231b, and the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 are arranged so as to sandwich the frame opening 231c. ing. In this case, the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 are separated from each other in a side-by-side state. Further, the unit main body 231 is fixed to the block base 136 in a state of being hidden on the back side of the game board 60a.

<First decoration device 232>
The first decoration device 232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the first decoration device 232, FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of the first decoration device 232, and FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining the operation of the link portions 242 and 243. 10A shows a case where the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 10B shows a case where the first decoration device 232 is in the effect state. Further, in FIG. 10 (a), the movement rendering unit 243b is omitted, and in FIG. 10 (b), the movement rendering unit 243b is illustrated by a virtual line.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first decoration device 232 includes a main body 241 attached to the unit main body 231, and a first link portion 242 and a second link rotatably provided with respect to the main body portion 241. And a portion 243. In the first decoration device 232, a link mechanism is constructed in which the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 rotate in association with each other with respect to the main body part 241 serving as a fixed link. Reference numeral 232 corresponds to a link device having a link mechanism. In the first decoration device 232, the first link portion 242 is arranged on the front surface side of the main body portion 241, and the second link portion 243 is arranged further on the front surface side of the first link portion 242.

  The main body 241 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape, and extends along the vertical frame portion 231a of the unit main body 231 with its long side extending vertically. The main body portion 241 is attached to the front surface of the vertical frame portion 231a with its thickness direction being the game machine front-back direction. In this case, the main body portion 241 does not overlap with the central opening 72 of the game board 60a in the front-rear direction, and is arranged at a position covered by the game board 60a from the front of the game machine.

  The first link part 242 and the second link part 243 extend along the front surface of the main body part 241. The first link portion 242 is connected to the main body portion 241 via the first shaft portion 244. The first link portion 242 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged such that the thickness direction thereof is the thickness direction of the main body portion 241.

  The first shaft portion 244 is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion 241 and the first link portion 242. In the present embodiment, the first shaft portion 244 is a convex portion that protrudes from the first link portion 242 toward the main body portion 241, and is inserted into the concave portion 244a formed in the main body portion 241 to the main body portion 241. It is fixed. In this case, the first shaft portion 244 connects the upper end portion of the main body portion 241 and one end portion of the first link portion 242.

  The second link portion 243 is connected to the main body portion 241 via the second shaft portion 245, and is also connected to the first link portion 242 via the third shaft portion 246. The second shaft portion 245 is fixed to the second link portion 243, while being slidable with respect to the main body portion 241.

  The second link part 243 has a link part body 243a provided with the second shaft part 245 and the third shaft part 246, and a movement effecting part 243b provided on the front surface side of the link part body 243a. The link portion main body 243a is formed in a plate shape and extends along the front surface of the main body portion 241 from the second shaft portion 245 to beyond the third shaft portion 246, and connects the second shaft portion 245 and the third shaft portion 246. The shaft can rotate with respect to the main body portion 241 and the first link portion 242. The movement rendering unit 243b has a shape and a color simulating a dog's face, is attached to the link unit body 243a in a state of hiding the link unit body 243a from the front of the gaming machine, and rotates the link unit body 243a. Along with (the operation of the link mechanism), it moves to the retracted position PA1 (see FIG. 6) and the effect position PA2 (see FIG. 4). The retracted position PA1 and the presentation position PA2 are arranged along a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the second shaft portion 245.

  The first decoration device 232 can enhance the effect by moving the movement effect part 243b from the retracted position PA1 to the effect position PA2, and the first decoration device 232 can also be referred to as an effect device. In addition, the first decoration device 232 shifts to the retracted state when the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1, and shifts to the rendering state when the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2. become.

  The second shaft portion 245 is fixed to the link portion main body 243a of the second link portion 243, while being movable along the plate surface of the main body portion 241. In the second link portion 243, the second shaft portion 245 is fixed to the end portion of the link portion main body 243a. When the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, the link portion main body 243a extends upward with the second shaft portion 245 side as the lower end. The second shaft portion 245 is attached to the tip of a portion of the link portion main body 243a that protrudes toward the main body portion 241.

  The third shaft portion 246 is a moving shaft portion that is fixed to each of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 and that moves as the link portions 242 and 243 rotate. In the present embodiment, the third shaft portion 246 is a convex portion that protrudes from the link portion main body 243a of the second link portion 243 toward the first link portion 242, and is formed in the concave portion 246a formed in the first link portion 242. It is fixed to the first link portion 242 in a state of being inserted. The third shaft portion 246 is arranged at the end of the first link portion 242 opposite to the first shaft portion 244, while being arranged at the intermediate position of the second link portion 243.

  The axes of the first shaft portion 244, the second shaft portion 245, and the third shaft portion 246 are in the thickness direction of the first decoration device 232 (the overlapping direction of the main body portion 241, the first link portion 242, and the second link portion 243). Extends along. In this case, the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 rotate along the plate surface of the main body part 241 about the shaft parts 244 to 246.

  In the first decoration device 232, the second shaft portion 245 slides vertically along the main body portion 241 so that the movement effecting portion 243b can move in the gaming machine width direction (left-right direction). The second shaft portion 245 is movable in a predetermined range below the first shaft portion 244, and the movement effecting portion 243b, as shown in FIG. The portion 245 is in the retracted position PA1 because it is in the lowermost position LA1 in the movement range, and the second shaft portion 245 is moved to the uppermost position HA1 in the movement range as shown in FIG. 10 (b). Will move to the presentation position PA2.

  When in the retreat position PA1, the movement effect part 243b is in a state of being hidden behind the back surface of the game board 60a, and the side surface on the second decoration device 233 side is visible from the front of the game machine. (See Figure 6). Further, in this case, the portion other than the movement rendering portion 243b in the second link portion 243 (for example, the link portion main body 243a) and the first link portion 242 are also hidden on the back side of the game board 60a, and the movement rendering portion is formed. Only the side surface of 243b is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  The effect position PA2 is a position closer to the second decoration device 233 than the retracted position PA1 and is an intermediate position between the pair of vertical frame portions 231a of the unit main body 231. When in the effect position PA2, the movement effect part 243b is exposed to the front of the display screen 75a, and almost the entire part can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (see FIG. 4). On the other hand, the link portion main body 243a and the first link portion 242 are hidden behind the movement rendering portion 243b, and cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine other than the movement rendering portion 243b.

  In the first decoration device 232, the movement range of the movement effect part 243b is set by structurally limiting the movement range of the second shaft part 245, whereby the movement effect part 243b is moved to the retracted position PA1. It can be moved to and from the production position PA2.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the main body portion 241 has a main body guide portion 251 that guides the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 245. The second shaft portion 245 can move along the main body guide portion 251 while being held in the main body guide portion 251 while keeping the axial direction. The main body guide portion 251 extends linearly in the vertical direction along the front surface of the main body portion 241 between a position spaced downward from the first shaft portion 244 and a position spaced upward from the lower end of the main body portion 241. ing.

  The first shaft portion 244 is arranged on an extension line of the main body guide portion 251. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 moves in a direction intersecting the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 245 (game machine width direction) along with the rotation of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243. It will be.

<Movement of link parts 242 and 243>
As illustrated in FIG. 10A, when the movement effecting unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1, the third shaft portion 246 is a position overlapping the front and rear of the main body guide portion 251 (on the movement locus of the second shaft portion 245). It is located in. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11A, the second shaft portion 245 is located at or near the bottom dead center in the link mechanism of the first decoration device 232, and this position is the lowest position LA1. The main body guide portion 251 extends below the position where the second shaft portion 245 exists when it is at the lowermost position LA1. In the present embodiment, when the second shaft portion 245 reaches the lower end portion of the main body guide portion 251, it means that the second shaft portion 245 has moved to the lowest position LA1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2, the third shaft portion 246 is centered as the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate. While moving toward the opening 72 side (second decoration device 233 side), the second shaft portion 245 moves upward (first shaft portion 244).

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2, the second shaft portion 245 and the third shaft portion 246 are arranged side by side at a position lower than the first shaft portion 244. Has been done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), the second shaft portion 245 is arranged at a position substantially the same as the third shaft portion 246 or at a position slightly higher than that, and this position is set to the uppermost position HA1. Is called. Further, in this case, the third shaft portion 246 is located at a position farthest from the main body guide portion 251 (movement locus of the second shaft portion 245) in the link mechanism of the first decoration device 232.

  When the movement rendering unit 243b is located at the rendering position PA2, the second shaft portion 245 is restricted from moving above the uppermost position HA1. The main body guide portion 251 has a lift stopper 252 that restricts the second shaft portion 245 from rising above the uppermost position HA1, and when the movement rendering portion 243b is at the rendering position PA2, the second shaft portion 245 is The lift stopper 252 is hooked from below.

  When the second shaft portion 245 is at the uppermost position HA1, the first link portion 242 connects the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246 with respect to the first straight line N1 and the second link portion 243 receives the second straight line N1. A second straight line N2 connecting the shaft portion 245 and the third shaft portion 246 intersects. At the intersection of the first straight line N1 and the second straight line N2, the link angle α1 between the first shaft portion 244 and the second shaft portion 245 is smaller than 90 degrees. It should be noted that the second straight line N2 is not orthogonal to the tangent line of the curved line drawn by the third shaft portion 246 as the movement trajectory along with the rotation of the first link portion 242. The link angle α1 corresponds to the intersection angle between the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243.

  Here, when an external force is applied to the first link part 242 in a direction in which the movement effecting part 243b moves to the retracted position PA1 (a direction in which the angle between the main body part 241 and the first link part 242 becomes smaller), The external force is also applied to the second shaft portion 245 in the direction of raising it, but since the raising of the second shaft portion 245 is restricted by the raising stopper 252, the second shaft portion 245 is positioned at the uppermost position HA1. Retained. In this case, since the link angle α1 is smaller than 90 degrees, an external force is applied to the second link portion 243 in the direction in which the second shaft portion 245 moves downward (the direction away from the first shaft portion 244). Unless the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated, the movement effect part 243b is also held at the effect position PA2.

  In addition, when the movement effect part 243b is in the effect position PA2, the second link part 243 is in the contraction restriction state in which the contraction of the intermediate arm 261 is restricted because the link angle α1 is 90 degrees or less. There is. Further, since the link angle α1 is larger than 90 degrees, the intermediate arm 261 is in a contraction-permitted state in which contraction is permitted.

  The moving effect part 243b appears from the back side of the game board 60a to the front of the display screen 75a by moving from the retracted position PA1 to the effect position PA2, but the second shaft part 245 exceeds the uppermost position HA1. When the second shaft portion 245 moves toward the first shaft portion 244, the movement effecting portion 243b moves again in a direction hidden behind the game board 60a as the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244. Therefore, the lift stopper 252 has a function of holding the movement rendering unit 243b in a state where the front exposed portion of the display screen 75a is the largest.

<Intermediate arm 261>
Returning to the description of FIG. 9, the first decoration device 232 has an intermediate arm 261 that connects the intermediate portion of the first link portion 242 to the main body portion 241. The intermediate arm 261 is expandable and contractable, and by expanding and contracting, the first link part 242 can be rotated with respect to the main body part 241. The intermediate arm 261 is in a contracted state when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1, and by extending from the contracted state, the first link is in a direction in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2 (direction for rendering). When the movement rendering unit 243b reaches the rendering position PA2 by rotating the portion 242, the movement rendering unit 243b is in the extended state. Further, by contracting from the stretched state, the first link portion 242 is rotated in a direction (moving direction) in which the movement effecting unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1.

  The intermediate arm 261 is arranged side by side on the first link portion 242 on the front surface side of the main body portion 241. In this case, the first link portion 242 and the intermediate arm 261 are arranged side by side in the gaming machine width direction. The intermediate arm 261 is connected to the main body portion 241 via the main body side shaft portion 262, and is also connected to the first link portion 242 via the link side shaft portion 263. The main body side shaft portion 262 is fixed to each of the intermediate arm 261 and the main body portion 241, and the link side shaft portion 263 is fixed to each of the intermediate arm 261 and the first link portion 242.

  The intermediate arm 261 is arranged on the front side of the main body 241. In the present embodiment, the main body side shaft portion 262 is a convex portion that protrudes from the intermediate arm 261 toward the main body portion 241, and is fixed to the main body portion 241 in a state of entering the concave portion 262a formed in the main body portion 241. ing. The intermediate arm 261 is arranged side by side with the first link portion 242 along the front surface of the main body portion 241. A concave portion is formed on the side surface of the first link portion 242, and the end portion of the intermediate arm 261 is inserted into the concave portion. The link-side shaft portion 263 is fixed to the first link portion 242 while penetrating the intermediate arm 261 in the recess of the first link portion 242.

  The link-side shaft portion 263 is arranged in the first link portion 242 at an intermediate position between the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246. The link side shaft portion 263 is arranged closer to the third shaft portion 246 than the center position between the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246, and the link side shaft portion 263 and the third shaft portion 246. The separation distance is larger than the separation distance between the link side shaft portion 263 and the first shaft portion 244.

  As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the main body side shaft portion 262 has a performance position PA2 in the width direction of the main body portion 241 rather than a position of the first link portion 242 when the movement performance portion 243b is at the retracted position PA1. Is arranged on the opposite side (on the side opposite to the second decoration device 233). Therefore, even when the intermediate arm 261 is arranged side by side on the first link portion 242, the first link portion 242 can be rotated without coming into contact with the main body side shaft portion 262. That is, it can be avoided that the intermediate arm 261 interferes with the rotation of the first link portion 242. It should be noted that the main body side shaft portion 262 is arranged on the opposite side of the performance position PA2 with the movement locus (main body guide portion 251) of the second shaft portion 245 interposed therebetween.

  Further, the main body side shaft portion 262 is arranged at a position lower than the first shaft portion 244 and higher than the movement range (main body guide portion 251) of the second shaft portion 245 in the vertical direction of the main body portion 241. Therefore, when the first link portion 242 rotates as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, the intermediate arm 261 does not enter the moving range of the second shaft portion 245. Therefore, even if the main body side shaft portion 262 is arranged on the opposite side of the production position PA2 with the main body guide portion 251 interposed therebetween, the second shaft portion 245 is slid and moved without contacting the intermediate arm 261. Can be made That is, it is possible to prevent the intermediate arm 261 from interfering with the rotation of the second link portion 243.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first arm portion 264 connected to the main body portion 241 via the main body side shaft portion 262 and to the first link portion 242 via the link side shaft portion 263. It also has a second arm portion 265 and an intermediate shaft portion 266 connecting the arm portions 264 and 265. The first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are capable of relatively rotating about the intermediate shaft portion 266 as an axis, and the intermediate arm 261 includes the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion. 265 expands by relatively rotating in the direction in which the crossing angle increases, and contracts by rotating in the direction in which the crossing angle decreases.

  The axis of the intermediate shaft portion 266 extends along the thickness direction of the first decoration device 232, and the intermediate shaft portion 266 moves along the plate surface of the main body portion 241 as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts. The first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are provided side by side along the axial direction of the intermediate shaft portion 266. The second arm portion 265 is arranged on the first link portion 242 side of the first arm portion 264, and the first arm portion 264 is in a state of being inserted between the second arm portion 265 and the main body portion 241. .. In this case, with respect to the first link portion 242, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are arranged side by side along the plate surface of the main body portion 241.

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate shaft portion 266 is a convex portion that projects from the first arm portion 264 toward the second arm portion 265, and the second arm portion 265 has an arm length through which the intermediate shaft portion 266 is inserted. The hole 265a is formed. A sandwiching member 267 sandwiching the second arm portion 265 in a rotatable state is provided on the opposite side of the first arm portion 264 with the second arm portion 265 sandwiched therebetween. The sandwiching member 267 is fixed to the tip of the intermediate shaft portion 266 with a screw or the like. The arm elongated hole 265a extends along the longitudinal direction of the second arm portion 265 (the direction in which the intermediate shaft portion 266 and the link-side shaft portion 263 are arranged), and the sliding movement of the intermediate shaft portion 266 along the longitudinal direction. Is possible. In this case, the intermediate shaft portion 266 slides while holding the orientation of the axis line.

<Movement of the intermediate arm 261>
As shown in FIGS. 10A and 11A, the intermediate arm 261 is in a folded state when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state (when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1). The first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are folded and extend in parallel. In this case, the intersection angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 is approximately 0 degrees. Further, in this case, both the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 extend along the gaming machine width direction. Here, the separation distance between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 in the first arm portion 264 is smaller than the separation distance between the link side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 in the second arm portion 265. When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the main body side shaft portion 262 is in a state of being inserted between the link side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266.

  When the intermediate arm 261 extends from the contracted state, the intersection angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 increases as the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 rotate. Go In this case, the intermediate shaft portion 266 should move from the side opposite to the link side shaft portion 263 with the main body side shaft portion 262 sandwiched between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the link side shaft portion 263. become.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, when the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 have their respective rotation tip sides (intermediate shaft portions 266). It rotates in a direction that passes below the main body side shaft portion 262. That is, it rotates forward. In this case, the intermediate shaft portion 266 passes between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the main body guide portion 251 on the side opposite to the first shaft portion 244 with the main body side shaft portion 262 interposed therebetween.

  As shown in FIGS. 10B and 11C, the intermediate arm 261 is unfolded when the intermediate arm 261 is in the extended state (when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the rendering position PA2), and the first arm unit 264 is released. The second arm portion 265 is in a linearly extended state. In this case, the angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion is approximately 180 degrees. Even when the intermediate arm 261 contracts from the extended state, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 rotate in a direction in which the intermediate shaft portion 266 passes below the main body side shaft portion 262.

  When the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, the position of the main body side shaft portion 262 does not change, while the link side shaft portion 263 moves along the width direction of the main body portion 241. When the intermediate arm 261 extends, the link side shaft portion 263 moves in a direction away from the main body side shaft portion 262, and accordingly, the intermediate arm 261 pushes the first link portion 242 laterally. On the other hand, when the intermediate arm 261 contracts, the link side shaft portion 263 moves in a direction to approach the main body side shaft portion 262, and accordingly, the intermediate arm 261 pulls the first link portion 242 toward the main body portion 241 side. It becomes a state.

  The intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts in a region that does not overlap the main body guide portion 251 in the thickness direction of the first decoration device 232. That is, the movement loci of the link-side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 that move with respect to the main body-side shaft portion 262 do not intersect with the movement loci of the second shaft portion 245 due to the sliding movement. Therefore, the expansion and contraction of the intermediate arm 261 and the sliding movement of the second shaft portion 245 are prevented from interfering with each other.

  The first decoration device 232 controls the reverse rotation stopper 269 (which controls the reverse rotation of the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 when the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state. (See FIG. 9). The reverse rotation stopper 269 is a convex portion protruding from the main body portion 241 toward the front of the gaming machine, and is arranged on the opposite side of the first link portion 242 with the main body side shaft portion 262 interposed therebetween. When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, at least one of the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 comes into contact with the reverse rotation stopper 269 from below, so that the intermediate shaft portion 266 moves toward the first shaft portion 244. Rotation of the arm portions 264 and 265 in the moving direction is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the intermediate arm 261 is in a contracted state, the main body side shaft portion 262, the link side shaft portion 263, and the intermediate shaft portion 266 are arranged in a straight line, and the intermediate arm 261 has the link side. An arm straight line N3 connecting the shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 intersects with the first straight line N1 of the first link portion 242. At the intersection of the arm straight line N3 and the first straight line N1, the arm angle α2 between the intermediate shaft portion 266 and the third shaft portion 246 is approximately 90 degrees.

  In this case, the intermediate arm 261 is substantially orthogonal to the first link portion 242, and the arm straight line N3 is a tangent to a curve drawn by the link-side shaft portion 263 as a movement locus as the first link portion 242 rotates. Almost matches. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 in a direction in which the movement effect part 243b moves to the effect position PA2, the arm parts 264 and 265 have a direction in which the arm angle α2 becomes small ( It is difficult to rotate in the normal rotation direction). That is, the intermediate arm 261 is difficult to extend.

  It is also assumed that an external force is applied to the link portions 242 and 243 in a direction in which the arm angle α2 increases (direction of reverse rotation). In this case, since the reverse rotation of the arm portions 264 and 265 is blocked by the reverse rotation stopper 269, it is also restricted that the arm portions 264 and 265 rotate backward and the intermediate arm 261 extends. Therefore, both normal rotation and reverse rotation of the arm portions 264 and 265 are restricted, and as a result, it is prevented that the intermediate arm 261 extends and the movement rendering unit 243b unintentionally moves to the rendering position PA2. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the second link portion 243 has a protruding portion 271 that protrudes from the third shaft portion 246 toward the side opposite to the first shaft portion 244. The projecting portion 271 is configured to include each of the link portion main body 243a and the movement rendering portion 243b, and the movement rendering portion 243b extends from the second shaft portion 245 beyond the third shaft portion 246. Therefore, when the movement rendering unit 243b is moved to the rendering position PA2, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the second link portion 243 does not have the protruding portion 271, the protruding dimension of the movement rendering unit 243b from the main body 241 is smaller. growing. Thereby, the presence of the movement effect part 243b that has moved to the effect position PA2 can be increased.

  When the movement effect part 243b is at the retracted position PA1, the first link part 242 and the intermediate arm 261 are in a state of being inserted into the gap between the protruding part 271 and the main body part 241. Here, the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first link portion 242 via the link side shaft portion 263 in a state of being arranged side by side along the front surface of the main body portion 241 with respect to the first link portion 242. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the separation distance between the second link portion 243 and the main body portion 241 because the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first link portion 242. That is, the thickness dimension of the first decoration device 232 can be minimized.

<Drive units 281 and 282>
As shown in FIG. 9, the first decoration device 232 includes a first drive unit 281 that drives the first link unit 242 to rotate, and a second drive unit that drives the second link unit 243 to rotate. And a portion 282. The drive units 281 and 280 are motors such as stepping motors having a rotary shaft unit, and the link units 242 and 243 can be rotated by rotating the rotary shaft unit. The drive units 281 and 283 are attached to the main body unit 241 in a state of protruding to the rear surface side of the main body unit 241, and are arranged vertically along the main body unit 241. In this case, the first drive unit 281 is arranged above the second drive unit 282. The first drive unit 281 may be referred to as a first motor and the second drive unit 282 may be referred to as a second motor. Further, the first drive unit 281 corresponds to the expansion / contraction drive unit.

  The first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 have different driving performances. Regarding the rated value of the drive torque, the first drive section 281 is larger than the second drive section 282, and the rated value of the drive speed (rotational speed of the rotary shaft section) is the second drive section 282. It is made larger than the first driving unit 281. In this case, the first drive unit 281 corresponds to the torque drive unit, and the second drive unit 282 corresponds to the speed drive unit. Here, in the first decoration device 232, since the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate together, the load for rotating the link portions 242 and 243 is applied to the first drive unit. 281, and the 2nd drive part 282 will be shared.

  For example, when the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 start driving at the same time, the first drive unit 281 has a larger rated torque, so that the link units 242, 243 are driven by the drive force of the first drive unit 281. The acceleration is greater than the acceleration of the link parts 242 and 243 by the driving force of the second driving part 282. In this case, the link parts 242 and 243 start to rotate by the driving force of the second drive part 282. For example, compared with the case where the link parts 242 and 243 start to rotate only by the drive force of the second drive part 282. As a result, the acceleration at the start of rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 increases.

  In addition, since the second drive unit 282 has a higher rated speed, the drive speed of the second drive unit 282, which has been slower in acceleration, becomes faster than the first drive unit when a predetermined time elapses after the drive units 281 and 282 start driving. 281 drive speed. In this case, the link parts 242, 243 are rotated by the driving force of the first driving part 281, and compared with the case where the link parts 242, 243 are rotated only by the driving force of the first driving part 281, for example. As a result, the maximum speed of the link portions 242 and 243 increases.

  The drive units 281 and 280 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions, and by rotating the respective rotary shaft portions by a predetermined rendering angle, the movement rendering unit 243b moves between the retracted position PA1 and the rendering position PA2. The link portions 242 and 243 are rotated by an angle required to move the link portions 242 and 243. In this case, the effect angle (for example, 270 degrees) of the second drive unit 282 is set to be larger than the effect angle (for example, 120 degrees) of the first drive unit 281. As a result, it is possible to select, as the first drive unit 281, a motor that emphasizes torque, that is, if the rated speed is small and the rated torque is large, and as the second drive unit 282, the rated speed is small even if the rated torque is small. It is possible to select a motor that places importance on speed, as long as it is large. In other words, it is not necessary to select a motor having a large rated torque and a large rated speed for these drive units 281 and 282. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost burden on the motors used as the drive units 281 and 282.

<Spring member 291>
The first decoration device 232 has a spring member 291 as a biasing unit that biases the link parts 242 and 243 in a direction in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2. The spring member 291 is a kind of coil spring that extends linearly, and is a tension spring that exerts an urging force in a contracting direction in a pulled state. The spring member 291 assists the rotation of the link parts 242 and 243 by the first drive part 281 and the second drive part 282, and the biasing force of the spring member 291 is applied to the link parts 242 and 243. For example, as compared with the case where the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated only by the driving force of the drive parts 281 and 283, the acceleration and the maximum speed at which the link parts 242 and 243 start to rotate are increased.

  The spring member 291 is connected to the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241 in a pulled state. The first link portion 242 has a link side hooking portion 292 on which one end of the spring member 291 is hooked, and the main body portion 241 has a main body side hooking portion 293 on which the other end of the spring member 291 is hooked. The spring member 291 is provided so as to be stretched over the link side hooking portion 292 and the main body side hooking portion 293. The link side hooking portion 292 and the main body side hooking portion 293 are positions where the separation distance of the hooking portions 292, 293 approaches by the rotation of the first link portion 242 in the direction in which the movement rendering portion 243b moves to the rendering position PA2. It is located in.

  The length dimension of the spring member 291 is smaller than the distance between the link side hooking portion 292 and the main body side hooking portion 293. Therefore, in the spring member 291, the link-side hooking portion 292 and the main body-side hooking portion 293 approach each other until the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2 (the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2). Thus, the urging force is continuously applied to the first link portion 242.

  The main body side hooking portion 293 is provided on the opposite side to the appearance direction (production position PA2) of the movement rendering portion 243b with the main body guiding portion 251 sandwiched therebetween, and arranged side by side on the main body guiding portion 251 in the width direction of the main body portion 241. It is arranged. In this case, the main body side hooking portion 293 is arranged below the reverse rotation stopper 269 and the main body side shaft portion 262. The main body side hooking portion 293 has a convex portion that projects from the main body portion 241 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end portion of the spring member 291 is fixed by a screw or the like in a state of being hooked on the convex portion. .. In this case, the spring member 291 is rotatable along the front surface of the main body portion 241 about the convex portion of the main body side hooking portion 293 as an axis.

  The first link portion 242 has a bulging portion 294 that bulges toward the opposite side of the effect position PA2 in the direction intersecting the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246 (direction substantially orthogonal to each other). The bulging portion 294 has a link side hooking portion 292. The link side hooking portion 292 has a convex portion protruding from the bulging portion 294 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end portion of the spring member 291 is fixed by a screw or the like in a state of being hooked on the convex portion. There is. In this case, the spring member 291 is rotatable along the front surface of the bulging portion 294 with the convex portion of the link side hooking portion 292 as an axis.

  The bulging portion 294 is in a state where a portion of the first link portion 242 closer to the first shaft portion 244 than the link side shaft portion 263 is bulging along the front surface of the main body portion 241, and the bulging portion 294 is located near The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the bulging portion 294 is gradually reduced toward the top. The link side hooking portion 292 is arranged at the tip of the bulging portion 294, and the bulging dimension of the bulging portion 294 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 241. That is, the separation distance between the first shaft portion 244 and the link side hooking portion 292 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 241.

  The spring member 291 extends vertically along the front surface of the main body 241 on the side opposite to the main body side shaft 262 and the main body guide 251 with the reverse rotation stopper 269 interposed therebetween. Here, since the turning radius of the link-side hooking portion 292 is as large as possible, that is, substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 241, the movement of the link-side hooking portion 292 in accordance with the turning of the first link portion 242. The direction is almost limited to the vertical direction. In this case, the spring member 291 can extend and contract in the width direction of the main body 241 without protruding beyond the reverse rotation stopper 269 toward the main body side shaft portion 262 side. Interference between expansion and contraction and sliding movement of the second shaft portion 245 and expansion and contraction of the spring member 291 can be avoided.

  Further, the fact that the turning radius of the link-side hooking portion 292 is made as large as possible means that the biasing force of the spring member 291 is used as the turning force for turning the first link portion 242, and that turning force is It will also increase. Here, when the first shaft portion 244 is the fulcrum, the link side hooking portion 292 is the force point, and the third shaft portion 246 is the action point, the separation distance between the fulcrum and the action point is relative to the separation distance between the fulcrum and the force point. Since the ratio is increased as much as possible, the urging force of the spring member 291 can maximize the acceleration and maximum speed at which the link portions 242, 243 start rotating.

<Transmission part 301, 302>
In the first decoration device 232, the first transmission portion 301 that transmits the driving force of the first driving portion 281 to the first link portion 242 and the driving force of the second driving portion 282 to the second link portion 243 (second shaft portion 245). ) And the 2nd transmission part 302. Here, the 1st transmission part 301 and the 2nd transmission part 302 are demonstrated, referring FIG. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the main body 241. Note that FIG. 12 is a view of the main body 241 as seen from the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the first transmission unit 301 and the second transmission unit 302 are mounted on the main body 241. The main body 241 has a front case body 311 forming the front surface thereof and a back case body 312 forming the back surface thereof, and the transmission portions 301 and 302 are housed between the case bodies 311 and 312. There is. The front case body 311 and the rear case body 312 are fixed to each other by screws or the like in a state of being overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (front-back direction). The case bodies 311 and 312 are made of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the transmission parts 301 and 302 arranged between the case bodies 311 and 312 are visible through the case bodies 311 and 312. There is. In this case, since the internal structure of the body portion 241 including the transmission portions 301 and 302 is visible, the maintenance work of the body portion 241 is easy.

<First transmission unit 301>
The state of the first transmission unit 301 is the state of the first gear 321 fixed to the rotating shaft of the first drive unit 281, the arm side gear 322 fixed to the main body side shaft 262 of the intermediate arm 261, and the intermediate arm 261. And a detection gear 323 for detecting The gears 321 to 323 are arranged along the plate surface of the main body 241 with their respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the main body 241. The first gear 321 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotating shaft of the first drive unit 281. The arm-side gear 322 and the detection gear 323 are arranged at positions where their teeth mesh with the teeth of the first gear 321, and are driven gears that rotate as the first gear 321 rotates.

  The driving force transmitted from the first drive unit 281 to the first transmission unit 301 is transmitted to the first link unit 242 via the intermediate arm 261. In the first transmission unit 301, the first gear 321 and the arm-side gear 322 rotate in conjunction with each other as the first drive unit 281 is driven, and the body-side shaft 262 moves as the arm-side gear 322 rotates. The rotation causes the intermediate arm 261 to expand and contract. By the way, when the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts with the rotation of the first link portion 242, the gears 321 to 323 also rotate with the expansion and contraction.

  The first drive unit 281 corresponds to a telescopic drive unit that extends and contracts the intermediate arm 261, and the first transmission unit 301 serves as an arm transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the first drive unit 281 to the second arm unit 265. Equivalent to. Further, the second transmission portion 302 corresponds to a link transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the second shaft portion 245 and rotating the second link portion 243 to shift the intermediate arm 261 from the contraction restricted state to the contraction permitted state. To do.

  As described above, in the intermediate arm 261, the intermediate shaft portion 266 of the first arm portion 264 can slide along the arm elongated hole 265a of the second arm portion 265. Therefore, when the first drive portion 281 is driven in the direction in which the intermediate arm 261 is extended, when the rotation direction of the first arm portion 264 approaches or coincides with the longitudinal direction of the arm elongated hole 265a, the intermediate shaft portion 266 is linked. The sliding movement is made toward the side shaft portion 263, and even if the first arm portion 264 is rotated by the driving force of the first driving portion 281, the intermediate arm 261 does not extend any further. This state of the intermediate arm 261 is called a folded state. The intermediate arm 261 shifts to the bent state when the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281 reaches a predetermined bending angle (for example, 90 degrees). In the first drive unit 281, the bending angle is smaller than the effect angle.

  Note that, while the intermediate arm 261 is extending from the contracted state, when the intersection angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 reaches 90 degrees, the rotation direction of the first arm portion 264 is changed. It coincides with the longitudinal direction of the arm long hole 265a. Therefore, when the intersecting angle of the arm portions 264 and 265 approaches 90 degrees, the intermediate shaft portion 266 can slide with respect to the second arm portion 265.

  Also, when an external force is applied to the second link portion 243 in a direction in which the link side shaft portion 263 approaches the intermediate shaft portion 266, the second link portion 243 may slide along the longitudinal direction of the arm elongated hole 265a. It will be possible. In this case, although the first arm portion 264 is not rotated, the intermediate arm 261 is contracted, and the distance between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the link side shaft portion 263 is reduced. Therefore, even when the intermediate arm 261 is in an extended state, for example, when the intersection angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 is smaller than 90 degrees, even if the first arm portion 264 is not rotated, It is possible to rotate the first arm portion 264 in a direction in which the link side shaft portion 263 approaches the main body side shaft portion 262.

  The main body 241 is provided with an arm sensor 325 that detects the state of the intermediate arm 261. The detection gear 323 has a detected part (not shown) to be detected by the arm sensor 325, and the arm sensor 325 can detect that the detected part is at a predetermined position. There is. The arm sensor 325 is arranged on the back side of the detection gear 323, and the detected portion is a convex portion protruding from the detection gear 323 toward the rear side arm sensor 325.

  The detected portion is detected by the arm sensor 325 when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state (when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1), and when the intermediate arm 261 extends from the contracted state (the movement rendering unit 243b). Is moved from the retracted position PA1). The detected portion is not detected again by the arm sensor 325 until the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state. Here, the gear ratio between the first gear 321 and the detection gear 323 is such that the detection gear 323 rotates by an angle smaller than 360 degrees (for example, 120 degrees) before the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state. It is designed to be large. Further, the detected part is arranged on the peripheral side of the detection gear 323, and moves along the circumferential direction of the detection gear 323 as the detection gear 323 rotates.

<Second transmission unit 302>
The second transmission unit 302 is interlocked with the second gear 331 fixed to the rotation shaft of the second drive unit 282, the pinion gear 332 that rotates in conjunction with the second gear 331, and the rotational movement of the pinion gear 332. And a rack 333 that performs a linear movement. The second gear 331 and the pinion gear 332 are arranged along the plate surface of the main body 241 with their respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the main body 241. The rack 333 is a long plate member extending along the plate surface of the main body 241, and has a plurality of teeth arranged along the long sides thereof.

  The second gear 331 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotating shaft portion of the second drive unit 282. The pinion gear 332 is arranged at a position where its teeth mesh with the respective teeth of the second gear 331 and the rack 333, and is a driven gear that rotates as the second gear 331 rotates. The rack 333 is a driven rack that linearly moves as the pinion gear 332 rotates.

  The rack 333 is arranged so as to extend along the longitudinal direction of the main body guide portion 251, and serves as a moving member that moves along the main body guide portion 251. In this case, the rack 333 is arranged on the back side of the main body guide portion 251 with the front case body 311 of the main body portion 241 interposed therebetween. The main body 241 has a guide groove (not shown) that guides the moving direction of the rack 333, and the rack 333 is provided in a state of being inserted in the guide groove. The guide groove is provided in the front case body 311 of the main body 241, and is formed by denting the inner side surface (the surface on the rear case body 312 side) of the front case body 311. The guide groove extends along the main body guide portion 251.

  The second shaft portion 245 is connected to the rack 333 via the main body guide portion 251, and the second shaft portion 245 moves along the main body guide portion 251 as the rack 333 slides. The main body guide portion 251 is formed by a main body elongated hole 251a formed in the front case body 311 of the main body portion 241, and the second shaft portion 245 is provided in the front case body 311 without being separated from the main body elongated hole 251a. It is installed.

  The main body elongated hole 251a penetrates the front case body 311 in the front-rear direction, and the second shaft portion 245 is provided so as to be inserted into the main body elongated hole 251a and sandwich the main body guiding portion 251 from the front and rear. .. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 is hooked on the front surface of the front case body 311, and the front shaft piece 245a inserted into the main body elongated hole 251a from the front side and the rear side in a state hooked on the back surface of the front case body 311. Has a rear side shaft piece 245b inserted into the main body elongated hole 251a, and the front side shaft piece 245a and the rear side shaft piece 245b are fixed by screws or the like.

  The movable range of the second shaft portion 245 is limited in the vertical direction by the main body elongated hole 251a. Of the inner peripheral surface of the main body elongated hole 251a, the ceiling surface 251b facing downward is for restricting the second shaft portion 245 contacted from below from moving above the uppermost position HA1 and is raised. The stopper 252 is this ceiling surface 251b. The bottom surface 251c that faces upward is a lowering regulation portion that regulates the movement of the second shaft portion 245 that abuts from above from below the lowermost position LA1. Note that, as described above, the second shaft portion 245 is located at the bottom dead center or a position close to the bottom dead center when it is at the lowermost position LA1, and therefore the second shaft portion 245 is lower than the lowermost position LA1 even if the lowering is not restricted by the bottom surface 251c. It is also possible that they will not move to.

  The second shaft portion 245 is capable of moving together with the rack 333 while being hooked on the rack 333 inside the main body portion 241. The rack 333 has a hook hole 335 into which the second shaft portion 245 is inserted from the front. The hook hole 335 is an elongated hole extending along the moving direction of the rack 333, and penetrates the rack 333 in the front-rear direction. In the second shaft portion 245, an intruding portion (not shown) that is in the hooking hole 335 is a convex portion that projects toward the rack 333, and this convex portion is formed by a part of the rear shaft piece 245b. ing.

  The hook hole 335 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main body guide portion 251 (main body long hole 251a) in the width direction of the main body portion 241. The width dimension of the hooking hole 335 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body elongated hole 251a. The length dimension of the hooking hole 335 is smaller than the length dimension of the main body elongated hole 251a, but is larger than the vertical dimension of the entry portion of the second shaft portion 245. Therefore, the second shaft portion 245 can move up and down relatively with respect to the hook hole 335 in a state where the second shaft portion 245 enters the hook hole 335.

  In the rack 333, of the inner peripheral surface of the hooking hole 335, the side surface extending in the vertical direction serves as a limiting means for limiting the moving direction of the second shaft portion 245 in the vertical direction. Further, among the inner peripheral surfaces of the hooking holes 335, the ceiling surface 335a facing downward is a downward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 245 downward when the rack 333 moves downward, and The facing bottom surface 335b is an upward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 245 upward when the rack 333 moves upward.

  When the second shaft portion 245 moves upward, the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the rendering position PA2, so the bottom surface 335b is the second axis in the direction in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2. The ceiling surface 335a corresponds to the first pushing portion that pushes the portion 245, and the ceiling surface 335a corresponds to the second pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 245 in the direction in which the movement rendering portion 243b returns to the retracted position PA1. The ceiling surface 335a and the bottom surface 335b are opposed to each other with the second shaft portion 245 interposed therebetween, and the distance between the ceiling surface 335a and the bottom surface 335b is larger than the height dimension of the second shaft portion 245. Therefore, the second shaft portion 245 is not in contact with both the ceiling surface 335a and the bottom surface 335b at the same time.

  The rack 333 is movable within a range in which at least a part of the hooking hole 335 overlaps with the main body elongated hole 251a in the front and back. When the rack 333 is at the highest position HA2, which is the highest position in its movable range (see FIG. 14C), the rack 333 is placed between the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 and the ceiling surface 251b of the main body elongated hole 251a. The two shaft portions 245 are in a sandwiched state. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 pushed up by the rack 333 is held at the uppermost position HA1 by being caught on the ceiling surface 251b of the main body elongated hole 251a, and the rack 333 is held above the uppermost position HA2. The upward movement is restricted by the second shaft portion 245.

  Incidentally, since the rack 333 can slide relative to the second shaft portion 245, even if the second shaft portion 245 is at the uppermost position HA1, it can be hooked from the uppermost position HA2 of the rack 333. The ceiling surface 335a of the hole 335 can be moved downward to a position where the ceiling surface 335a contacts the second shaft portion 245.

  On the other hand, when the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2 which is the lowest position in the movable range (see FIG. 13A), the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 is almost the same as the bottom surface 251c of the main body elongated hole 251a. It is in the height position. In this case, unlike the case where the second shaft portion 245 is placed on the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 and the second shaft portion 245 is separated from the bottom surface 335b upward, the rack 333 is moved upward. The bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 immediately pushes up the second shaft portion 245 by moving the second shaft portion 245. Further, this state can also be referred to as a state in which the rack 333 is moved to the lowest position LA2 by the second shaft portion 245 pushing down the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335.

  A rack sensor 337 that detects that the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2 is attached to the main body 241. The rack 333 has a detected portion 338 that is a detection target of the rack sensor 337, and the rack sensor 337 detects that the detected portion 338 is at a predetermined position, so that the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2. Detect that there is. The rack sensor 337 is fixed to the front case body 311 of the main body 241 with a screw or the like in a state of being arranged on the front side of the rack 333, and the detected portion 338 moves forward from the rack 333 toward the detected portion 338. It is a convex portion that protrudes into the.

  The detected part 338 is arranged below the hooking hole 335 in the rack 333, and is detected by the rack sensor 337 when the rack 333 is at the lowermost position LA2, and the rack 333 is moved upward from the lowermost position LA2. If not detected. The detected portion 338 is projected to the front surface side of the main body portion 241 through the main body elongated hole 251a, and the protruding portion is a portion detected by the rack sensor 337. A slit extending downward from the main body elongated hole 251a is formed in the front case body 311 of the main body portion 241, and when the rack 333 moves toward the lowermost position LA2, the detected portion 338 moves to the main body. It is detected by the rack sensor 337 by moving through the slit to a position below the bottom surface 251c of the long hole 251a.

  The detected part 338 extends along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack 333 and has a predetermined length dimension in the vertical direction. This length is larger than the length of the detection range of the rack sensor 337 in the vertical direction. In this case, the rack sensor 337 can detect the detected portion 338 not only when the rack 333 is at the lowermost position LA2 but also when the rack 333 is at a position slightly higher than the lowermost position LA2. .. For example, in the configuration in which the length dimension of the detected portion 338 is extremely small in the vertical direction, the detected portion 338 exists at a position outside the detection range of the rack sensor 337 even though the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2. Therefore, there is a concern that the rack sensor 337 cannot detect the detected portion 338.

<Operation of the first decoration device 232>
Next, an operation mode of the first decoration device 232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10, 13, and 14. FIG. 13 is an operation diagram when the first decoration device 232 shifts from the retracted state to the rendering state, and FIG. 14 is an operation diagram when the first decoration device 232 shifts from the rendering state to the retracted state. 13 and 14, the height position of the axis of the second shaft portion 245 is shown as the uppermost position HA1 or the lowermost position LA1, and the height position of the lower end of the rack 333 is the uppermost position HA2 or the lowermost position LA2. Is shown as. Further, the front case body 311 is omitted and a schematic view of the internal structure of the main body portion 241 is shown, and teeth of the gears 321 to 323, 331 and 332 of the transmission portions 301 and 302 and the rack 333 are omitted. There is. Further, in the enlarged views of FIGS. 13A to 13C and FIGS. 14A and 14B, the positional relationship between the second shaft portion 245 and the hook hole 335 is shown, and the enlarged view of FIG. In the figure, the positional relationship between the intermediate shaft portion 266 and the arm elongated hole 265a in the intermediate arm 261 is shown.

<Appearance of movement rendering unit 243b>
First, a case will be described in which, in the first decoration device 232, the movement rendering unit 243b moves from the retracted position PA1 toward the rendering position PA2.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state (when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1), the second shaft portion 245 and the rack 333 are respectively in the lowest position LA1. , LA2. In this case, since the intermediate arm 261 in the contracted state restricts the rotation of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243, the urging force of the spring member 291 causes the link portions 242 and 243 to rotate. This is suppressed, and the movement effect part 243b does not appear in front of the display screen 75a.

  The first decoration device 232 shifts to the effect state by driving both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 in the direction (normal rotation) for moving the movement effect unit 243b to the effect position PA2. When the driving units 281 and 280 start driving at the same time, the acceleration of the first driving unit 281 becomes larger than the acceleration of the second driving unit 282 as described above. Therefore, the operation of extending the intermediate arm 261 to rotate the link portions 242 and 243 when the driving of the first driving unit 281 is started causes the rack 333 to move to the second shaft portion when the driving of the second driving unit 282 is started. This operation is performed earlier than the operation of pushing up 245 and rotating the link portions 242 and 243.

  For a predetermined period from the start of driving of the drive units 281, 282, the ascending speed of the second shaft unit 245 accompanying the driving of the first driving unit 281 is higher than the ascending speed of the rack 333 accompanying the driving of the second driving unit 282. As shown in FIG. 13B, the second shaft portion 245 is separated from the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 of the rack 333 upward. In this case, for example, unlike the configuration in which the second shaft portion 245 is fixed in a state where the second shaft portion 245 does not slide with respect to the rack 333, the work of lifting the rack 333 by the second drive portion 282 is not performed. .. That is, the driving force of the first drive unit 281 operates the rack 333 of the second transmission unit 302, the pinion gear 332, the second gear 331, and the rotation shaft portion of the second drive unit 282. It is not used, and is effectively used for rotating the first link portion 242.

  Moreover, since the biasing force of the spring member 291 is applied to the first link portion 242, the link portions 242 and 243 rotate at a speed higher than the rotation speed obtained by the driving force of the first drive portion 281. .. Therefore, while the link parts 242 and 243 are being rotated by the driving force of the first drive part 281, it is possible to speed up the movement of the movement effecting part 243b toward the effect position PA2.

  After that, when the drive speed of the first drive unit 281 reaches the maximum speed, the ascending speed of the rack 333 due to the drive of the second drive unit 282 eventually becomes higher than that of the second shaft unit 245 due to the drive of the first drive unit 281. The rack speed 333 becomes higher than the ascending speed, and as illustrated in FIG. 13C, the rack 333 that has been rising after being delayed from the second shaft portion 245 catches up with the second shaft portion 245. In this case, since the rack 333 is pushed up while the second shaft portion 245 is hooked on the ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335, the second driving portion 282 is driven at a speed higher than the driving force of the first driving portion 281. The link parts 242 and 243 are rotated by the force. As a result, the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2 at a speed higher than the moving speed of the movement rendering unit 243b by the driving force of the first drive unit 281.

  In addition to the driving of the drive units 281 and 282, the biasing force of the spring member 291 is applied to the first link unit 242, so that the link units 242 and 243 are rotated by the drive force of the second drive unit 282. Rotates at a speed greater than the speed. As a result, the movement rendering unit 243b appears vigorously in front of the display screen 75a.

  The first driving unit 281 is stopped when the rack 333 catches up with the second shaft 245. Here, when the rack 333 is pushing up the second shaft portion 245, the rotating shaft portion of the first driving unit 281 rotates at a speed faster than the rated speed of the first driving unit 281. In the 1st drive unit 281, an electromotive force is generated in a direction in which the rotational speed exceeding the low rated speed is reduced (direction in which rotation of the rotary shaft portion is blocked). That is, the first drive unit 281 acts as a power generation brake that exerts a deterrent force against the ascent of the second shaft portion 245 (rotation of the link portions 242 and 243). Therefore, when the driving force of the second driving unit 282 is in a state of being applied to the driving speed of the first driving unit 281, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped, so that the link units 242 and 243 rotate. It is possible to further speed up the movement.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the rack 333 reaches the uppermost position HA2, the second shaft portion 245 pushed up by the rack 333 also reaches the uppermost position HA1, and the movement rendering unit 243b sets the rendering position. You have moved to PA2. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 is caught by the rising stopper 252 of the main body guide portion 251 (the ceiling surface 251b of the main body elongated hole 251a), so that the rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 suddenly stops. That is, the movement of the movement effecting unit 243b suddenly stops. When the movement effect part 243b is in the effect position PA2, the ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333 is separated upward from the second shaft part 245.

  The drive units 281 and 281 stop driving when the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2. A direction in which the angle between the first link part 242 and the main body part 241 becomes smaller due to the urging force of the spring member 291, when the drive parts 281 and 280 stop driving (direction in which the movement rendering part 243b moves to the retracted position PA1). Therefore, there is a concern that the first link portion 242 may rotate. On the other hand, as described above, when the movement rendering unit 243b is located at the rendering position PB2, the intersection angle (link angle α1) between the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 becomes smaller than 90 degrees. By virtue of the fact that the second shaft portion 245 is caught by the rising stopper 252, the rotation of the first link portion 242 is blocked against the biasing force of the spring member 291. Therefore, even if the drive of the drive units 281 and 282 is stopped, the movement rendering unit 243b is held at the rendering position PA2.

<Storing of the moving effect part 243b>
Next, a case where the movement effect unit 243b returns from the effect position PA2 to the retracted position PA1 will be described.

  When the first decoration device 232 transitions to the retracted state, first, only the second drive unit 282 of the drive units 281 and 282 drives in the direction (reverse rotation) in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1. In this case, the rack 333 moves downward with the start of the driving of the second drive unit 282, while the second shaft unit 245 does not move because the drive of the first drive unit 281 does not start. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14B, the ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333 is hooked on the second shaft portion 245 from above, and the rack 333 that moves downward in this state is moved to the first position. The biaxial portion 245 will be pulled down. In this case, the link parts 242 and 243 rotate in the direction in which the movement effecting part 243b moves to the retracted position PA1 against the biasing force of the spring member 291.

  When the second shaft portion 245 moves downward while the first driving portion 281 is not driven, the link-side shaft portion 263 is moved in a state where the intermediate arm 261 is not folded along with the rotation of the first link portion 242. It moves so as to approach the intermediate shaft portion 266 (see FIG. 14C). In this case, even if the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 do not rotate, the intermediate arm 261 moves the intermediate shaft portion 266 relatively along the arm elongated hole 265a, so that the intermediate shaft portion 261 moves. The distance between 266 and the link-side shaft portion 263 becomes smaller, and the intermediate arm 261 contracts. That is, unlike the configuration in which the intermediate shaft portion 266 is fixed in a state where it does not slide with respect to the second arm portion 265, the rotation of the first link portion 242 in the direction of approaching the main body side shaft portion 262 is intermediate. It is possible to prevent the arm 261 from blocking and prevent the first arm portion 264 from rotating around the main body side shaft portion 262 as an axis with the rotation of the first link portion 242.

  In particular, even if the second shaft portion 245 is pulled down by the rack 333 and the first link portion 242 does not have to rotate, the driving force of the second drive portion 282 rotates the first link portion 242. Since it is not used to rotate the gears 321 to 323 of the first transmission unit 301 or to rotate the rotation shaft of the first driving unit 281, the driving force of the second driving unit 282 is applied to the first link unit 242. Also, it can be efficiently used for rotating the second link portion 243.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 14C, when the rack 333 descending by the driving force of the second drive unit 282 reaches the lowermost position LA2, the second drive unit 282 is stopped while the second drive unit 282 is stopped. The first driving unit 281 starts driving. It should be noted that the rack sensor 337 detects the detected portion 338 of the rack 333 to detect that the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2. Further, the position of the movement effecting unit 243b when the rack 333 reaches the lowermost position LA2 corresponds to the switching position. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 is still hooked on the ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333.

  When the driving of the first driving unit 281 is started, the first arm unit 264 is rotated along with the driving start of the first driving unit 281, so that the intermediate shaft unit 266 is linked along the arm elongated hole 265a. The intermediate shaft 266 is moved to the side away from the side shaft 263, and the intermediate shaft 266 is caught on the end of the arm elongated hole 265a, whereby the folding of the intermediate arm 261 is started. Then, as the link portions 242 and 243 rotate with the folding of the intermediate arm 261, the second shaft portion 245 moves downward inside the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333, and the intermediate arm 261 is contracted. By moving, the lowest position LA1 is reached.

  The first driving unit 281 stops driving as the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the contracted state. It should be noted that the detection of the detected portion of the detection gear 323 by the arm sensor 325 detects that the intermediate arm 261 has shifted to the contracted state.

  The movement of the second shaft portion 245 in the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333 as the first driving portion 281 is driven means that the driving force of the first driving portion 281 causes the rack 333 or the pinion gear of the second transmission portion 302 to move. 332, the second gear 331, etc. are not operated, and it is not used for rotating the rotating shaft part of the second drive part 282, but it is efficiently used for rotating the link parts 242, 243. Become.

  Moreover, when moving the effect production unit 243b from the production position PA2 to the retracted position PA1, by not simultaneously driving the second drive unit 282 and the first drive unit 281, the power consumed by the first decoration device 232 is reduced. The peak value can be reduced. As a result, for example, in a gaming hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 equipped with the first decoration device 232 are installed, even if the first decoration devices 232 of the respective pachinko machines 10 simultaneously shift from the effect state to the retracted state, the game hall. It is possible to avoid that the peak value of the power consumption is excessively large.

<Movement production section 243b>
The movement rendering unit 243b of the second link unit 243 is different in shape and size between when it is at the retracted position PA1 and when it is at the rendering position PA2. Here, a configuration regarding the movement rendering unit 243b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the second link portion 243.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the movement rendering unit 243b includes an intermediate member 341 that forms an intermediate portion of the movement rendering unit 243b, an upper member 342 that forms an upper portion, and a lower member 343 that forms a lower portion. have. The intermediate member 341 is attached to the link body 243a in a non-moving state, and the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are movable in directions in which they are separated from each other with the intermediate member 341 interposed therebetween. The upper member 342 has a shape and color imitating the eyes of a dog's face, the intermediate member 341 has a shape and color imitating the dog's neck, nose and upper jaw, and the lower member 343 has a shape of a dog's face. It has a shape and color that imitates the lower jaw of the face.

  In addition, when the moving effect part 243b is in the retracted position, the lower member 343 is arranged on the effect position PA2 side with respect to the intermediate member 341, and the upper member 342 is opposite to the effect position PA2 with respect to the intermediate member 341. It is located on the side. The lower surface of the lower member 343 (the surface on the side of the effect position PA2) extends in the up-down direction along the peripheral edge of the central opening 72 of the game board 60a when the movement effect part 243b is at the retracted position PA1, and the center. It is arranged at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine through the opening 72. Therefore, an auxiliary display unit 343a is provided on the lower surface of the lower member 343 to enhance the effect by being visually recognized even when the movement effect unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1. The auxiliary display unit 343a displays characters such as "Attention of dog" and is arranged at a position that can be read from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 when the movement effecting unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1.

  The movement effecting part 243b has an upper base 345 and a lower base 346 attached to the link body 243a as a base for the upper member 342 and the lower member 343. The bases 345 and 346 are all arranged on the front surface side of the link portion main body 243a, and are displaceably attached to the link portion main body 243a. Here, the intermediate member 341 is fixed to the link body 243a in a state where it is not displaced with respect to the link body 243a. In this case, the bases 345 and 346 are relatively displaced with respect to the link body 243a, so that the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are relatively displaced with respect to the intermediate member 341.

  The movement rendering unit 243b is capable of transitioning between a reduced state in which it is reduced as a whole and a non-reduced state in which it is not reduced as a whole. The upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are contracted positions Q1a and Q1b (see FIG. 16A) in which the movement rendering unit 243b is contracted by approaching each other, and an expansion in which the movement rendering unit 243b is expanded by moving away from each other. It is movable to the positions Q2a and Q2b (see FIG. 16C), and the movement rendering unit 243b is reduced by moving the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 to the reduced positions Q1a and Q1b, respectively. By shifting to the extended state and moving to the extended positions Q2a and Q2b, the extended state is entered.

  The movement rendering unit 243b has a shape that imitates the dog's face as a whole when in the expanded state. On the other hand, in the contracted state, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 enter the inside of the intermediate member 341, so that the vertical dimension of the movement rendering unit 243b is reduced and the dog's face is crushed vertically. It is in a state like that.

  In the second link part 243, the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 move toward each other, so that the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 move to the contracted positions Q1a and Q1b, respectively, and the upper base 345 and the lower base 345 move. As the base 346 moves away from each other, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 move to the expanded positions Q2a and Q2b.

<Motion conversion unit 355>
The second link part 243 has a link mechanism that moves the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 by rotating the second link part 243 relative to the first link part 242. The link mechanism is mounted on the link body 243a. The link portion main body 243a has a front case body 351 that forms the front surface thereof and a back case body 352 that forms the back surface thereof. Between the case bodies 351 and 352, the first link portion 242 is provided. A motion conversion unit 355 that converts the rotation of the second link unit 243 into the movement of the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 is housed. The front case body 351 and the rear case body 352 are fixed to each other with screws or the like in a state of being overlapped with each other in the thickness direction.

  The case bodies 351 and 352 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the motion converting portion 355 and the like arranged between the case bodies 351 and 352 are visible through the case bodies 351 and 352. There is. In this case, since the internal structure of the link part body 243a including the motion converting part 355 is visible, maintenance work of the link part body 243a is facilitated.

  The motion converting portion 355 has a third gear 361 fixed to the third shaft portion 246, an upper gear 362 that supports the upper member 342, and a lower gear 363 that supports the lower member 343. The third gear 361 is not a gear that rotates relative to the third shaft portion 246, but is fixed to the first link portion 242 via the third shaft portion 246, so that the third gear portion 361 is fixed to the first link portion 242. On the other hand, when the second link portion 243 rotates, it is a gear that rotates relatively to the second link portion 243. The axes of the third gear 361, the upper gear 362, and the lower gear 363 all extend in parallel with the axis of the third shaft 246 along the direction in which the link body 243a and the bases 345, 346 are arranged.

  The motion converting section 355 has an auxiliary gear 364 provided at a position meshing with the third gear 361. A plurality of (for example, two) upper gears 362 are provided in the motion converting unit 355, and the auxiliary gear 364 is arranged at a position that meshes with one upper gear 362 of the plurality of upper gears 362. The plurality of upper gears 362 are arranged at positions meshing with each other along the width direction (width direction of the dog's face) of the link body 243a. Further, the lower gear 363 is arranged at a position that directly meshes with the third gear 361. Therefore, when the third gear 361 rotates relative to the second link portion 243, the upper gears 362 and the lower gear 363 respectively rotate with the rotation of the third gear 361.

  Each upper gear 362 has an upper support portion 362 a that supports the upper member 342. The upper support portion 362a extends in a rod shape from the upper gear 362 toward the front, and is fixed to the upper base 345 while penetrating the front case body 351. The upper support portion 362a is arranged on the peripheral side of the upper gear 362, and moves along the circumferential direction of the upper gear 362 as the upper gear 362 rotates.

  The front case body 351 is formed with an upper insertion hole 371 through which the upper support portion 362a is inserted. The upper insertion hole 371 is individually provided for each upper gear 362. The upper insertion hole 371 is a curved elongated hole that extends along the peripheral edge of the upper gear 362, and the upper support portion 362 a slides along the upper insertion hole 371 as the upper gear 362 rotates. It is possible to do. The rotation angle of the upper gear 362 required to move the upper member 342 between the contracted position Q1a and the expanded position Q2a is smaller than 180 degrees. Both ends of the upper insertion hole 371 are arranged along a direction intersecting with the arrangement direction of the plurality of upper gears 362 (the height direction of the link body 243a).

  The upper base 345 is in a state of being stretched over the upper support portion 362a of each upper gear 362, and can be linearly moved in the height direction of the link body 243a in that state. .. An upper shaft portion 372 fixed to the upper support portion 362a by a screw or the like is attached to the upper base 345 so as to be slidable along the width direction of the link body 243a. An upper cross hole 373 extending in the width direction of the link body 243a is formed in the upper base 345, and the upper shaft portion 372 slides along the upper cross hole 373. In this case, as the upper gear 362 rotates, the upper support portion 362a moves along both the upper insertion hole 371 and the upper intersecting hole 373, so that the upper base 345 is curved along the upper insertion hole 371. Instead of moving, it moves linearly in the height direction of the link body 243a.

  The length dimension of the upper cross hole 373 is set to be equal to or larger than the curved dimension of the upper insertion hole 371 (the projecting dimension of the curved portion with respect to the straight line connecting both ends of the upper insertion hole 371).

  The lower gear 363 has a lower support portion 363 a that supports the lower member 343. The lower support portion 363a extends in a rod shape from the lower gear 363 toward the front, and is fixed to the lower base 346 in a state of penetrating the front case body 351. The lower support portion 363a is arranged on the peripheral side of the lower gear 363, and moves along the circumferential direction of the lower gear 363 as the lower gear 363 rotates.

  The front case body 351 is formed with a lower insertion hole 375 through which the lower support portion 363a is inserted. The lower insertion hole 375 is a curved long hole extending along the peripheral edge of the lower gear 363, and the lower support portion 363 a is a lower insertion hole 375 as the lower gear 363 rotates. It is possible to slide along. The rotation angle of the lower gear 363 required to move the lower member 343 to the contracted position Q1b and the expanded position Q2b is smaller than 180 degrees. Both ends of the lower insertion hole 375 are arranged along the height direction of the link body 243a, like the both ends of the upper insertion hole 371.

  The lower base 346 can be linearly moved in the height direction of the link body 243a. A lower shaft portion 376 fixed to the lower support portion 363a with a screw or the like is attached to the lower base 346 so as to be slidable along the width direction of the link body 243a. A lower cross hole 377 extending in the width direction of the link body 243a is formed in the lower base 346, and the lower shaft portion 376 slides along the lower cross hole 377. Further, the link body 243a is provided with a lower rail portion 378 for guiding the moving direction of the lower base 346, and the lower rail portion 378 is linear in the height direction of the link body 243a. It is extended. In this case, as the lower gear 363 rotates, the lower support portion 363a moves along both the lower insertion hole 375 and the lower intersecting hole 377, so that the lower base 346 is moved to the lower insertion hole 375. Instead of moving along the lower rail portion 378 in a straight line in the height direction of the link body 243a.

  The length dimension of the lower cross hole 377 is the same as or larger than the curved dimension of the lower insertion hole 375.

  The lower member 343 is in a state in which it can swing relative to the lower base 346. The lower member 343 is attached to the lower base 346 via the swinging member 381. The swinging member 381 is arranged on the front surface side of the lower base 346, and is rotatable with respect to the lower base 346 about the swing shaft portion 382.

  The lower base 346 is provided with an angle limiting portion 383 that limits the rotation angle (swing angle) of the swinging member 381 with respect to the lower base 346. The angle limiting portion 383 is a convex portion that protrudes from the lower base 346 toward the swinging member 381, and is in a state of entering into the angle limiting hole 384 formed in the swinging member 381. In the circumferential direction of the swing shaft portion 382, the length dimension of the angle limiting portion 383 is made slightly smaller than the length dimension of the angle limiting hole 384, and the angle limiting portion 383 slightly moves with respect to the angle limiting hole 384. It is possible. In this case, since the movement range of the angle limiting portion 383 is limited by the angle limiting hole 384, the swinging member 381 swings about the swinging shaft portion 382 with respect to the lower base 346 by a predetermined angle (for example, 3 degrees). Is possible.

  The swing shaft portion 382 is arranged at a position closer to the end portion of the lower member 343 in the width direction of the link body 243a, and the axis of the swing shaft portion 382 is aligned with the lower base 346 and the swing member 381. Running along. In this case, the lower member 343 swings with respect to the intermediate member 341 with one end as an axis.

  In the lower member 343, the portion on the swing shaft portion 382 side (rotation base end side) imitates the base side of the lower jaw of the dog, and the portion on the side opposite to the swing shaft portion 382 (rotation tip end side). Imitates the tip of the lower jaw of a dog. In this case, the lower member 343 sways with respect to the lower base 346, thereby simulating a state in which the dog repeatedly repeatedly opens and closes its mouth.

  Shaking of the lower member 343 with respect to the lower base 346 is restricted when the lower member 343 is in the contracted position Q1b, and is not restricted when the lower member 343 is in the expanded position Q2b. The link portion main body 243a is provided with a shake restricting portion 385 that restricts the shake by being caught by the lower member 343 when the lower member 343 is at the contracted position Q1b. The shake restricting portion 385 is a convex portion that protrudes from the link portion main body 243a toward the lower member 343, faces the lower member 343 when the lower member 343 is in the contracted position Q1b, and is a lower member. When the extension member 343 is in the expanded position Q2b, it is arranged at a position that does not face the lower member 343. The shake restricting portion 385 extends from the lower rail portion 378 toward the opposite side of the lower base 346 along the front surface of the link body 243a.

<Modification of the moving effect part 243b>
Next, the deformation of the movement effect part 243b will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the movement rendering unit 243b. In addition, in FIG. 16, in order to clarify the positional relationship between the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 with respect to the link body 243a, the movement rendering unit 243b is illustrated by a virtual line (two-dot chain line). Further, the height positions of the upper shaft portion 372 and the lower shaft portion 376 are shown as the height positions of the upper member 342 and the lower member 343.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movement rendering unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1, both the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are at the contracted positions Q1a and Q1b. Here, a gap is formed between the intermediate member 341 and the link portion main body 243a, and the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 at the contracted positions Q1a and Q1b have the gap (on the back side of the intermediate member 341). It is in a state of getting in. In this case, the width dimension of the movement rendering unit 243b (height dimension of the dog's face) is almost the same as the width dimension of the main body unit 241, and the display screen 75a is displayed when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1. It does not stick out in front of.

  When the link parts 242 and 243 rotate in the direction in which the movement effect part 243b moves to the effect position PA2, the third gear 361 rotates together with the first link part 242 relative to the second link part 243. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16B, the upper support portion 362a (upper shaft portion 372) moves along the upper insertion hole 371 and the upper cross hole 373 as the third gear 361 rotates, The upper member 342 moves in a direction away from the intermediate member 341. In addition, the lower support 363a (lower shaft 376) moves along the lower insertion hole 375 and the lower intersecting hole 377 as the third gear 361 rotates, so that the lower member 343 becomes an intermediate member. It moves in a direction away from 341. As the movement effect unit 243b gets closer to the effect position PA2, the moving distances of the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 increase, and the dog effect face expands vertically as a whole of the movement effect unit 243b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16C, when the movement rendering unit 243b reaches the rendering position PA2, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 move to the expanded positions Q2a and Q2b, respectively, so that the movement rendering unit 243b. Becomes a state that imitates the dog's face as a whole. In this case, the height dimension of the movement rendering unit 243b is larger than the height dimension (width dimension of the main body portion 241) when the movement rendering unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1. Here, when the movement effect part 243b appears vigorously in front of the display screen 75a, the larger the movement effect part 243b, the easier the player is to be surprised. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the movement rendering unit 243b shifts to the expanded state in accordance with the movement to the rendering position PA2 is greater than the configuration in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2 in the reduced state. The effect produced by the appearance of the movement production unit 243b can be enhanced.

  In addition, the movement rendering unit 243b moves at a high speed from the retracted position PA1 toward the rendering position PA2, and suddenly stops at the rendering position PA2. In this case, the lower member 343, which has been rotating about the third shaft portion 246 as a part of the second link portion 243, also suddenly stops, so that the lower member 343 sways due to the impact of the sudden stop. The swaying is performed with the maximum swing width about the shaft 382 as an axis. In other words, the dog's mouth will open and close in small steps. In this way, even after the movement rendering unit 243b has stopped at the rendering position PA2, the effect produced by the movement rendering unit 243b can be enhanced by changing the shape of the movement rendering unit 243b. Note that the higher the appearance speed of the movement rendering unit 243b, the greater the impact applied to the lower member 343 with the sudden stop of the movement rendering unit 243b, and the lower member 343 shakes violently to enhance the rendering effect. It will be.

  When the moving effect part 243b moves to the effect position PA2 and then returns to the retracted position PA1, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 approach the contracted positions Q1a and Q1b as the move effect part 243b approaches the retracted position PA1, and the move effect. The portion 243b shifts to the contracted state as it reaches the retracted position PA1. The movement rendering unit 243b protrudes toward the central opening 72 side when the height dimension (height dimension of the dog's face) in the retracted position PA1 is smaller than the height dimension in the rendering position PA2. It is stored on the back side of the game board 60a in the absence. Therefore, as compared with a configuration in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1 in the expanded state, the storage space for storing the movement rendering unit 243b on the back side of the game board 60a can be small. That is, by deforming the movement effect unit 243b, it is possible to realize both improvement of the effect and reduction of the storage space of the movement effect unit 243b.

  Further, since the relative rotation of the second link portion 243 with respect to the first link portion 242 is used to deform the movement effecting portion 243b (movement of the upper member 342 and the lower member 343), the movement effecting portion. There is no need to use a dedicated drive to deform 243b. As a result, energy saving can be achieved in the configuration in which the movement rendering unit 243b is deformed.

<Electrical wiring of the first decoration device 232>
The first decoration device 232 has a plurality of light emitting units (not shown). In the first decoration device 232, the effect is enhanced by the light emitting section emitting light in accordance with the movement of the movement effecting section 243b. The light emitting unit has a light emitting body such as an LED and a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of the light emitting bodies are mounted, and is provided in the second link section 243. In the second link portion 243, a part of the upper member 342, the lower member 343, and the intermediate member 341 is formed as a light transmissive portion by a light transmissive member, and the light emitting portion is on the back side of the light transmissive portion. It is arranged. When the light emitting unit emits light, for example, the inside of the dog's mouth, the dog's eyes, and the auxiliary display unit 343a are illuminated.

  Electric wiring is connected to the light emitting unit, and power is supplied from the power supply / launch control device 191 to the light emitting substrate through the electric wiring. The electric wiring is laid inside the link portions 242 and 243 without causing any trouble in the rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 and the deformation of the movement effecting portion 243b. In the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246, wiring through holes are formed at positions overlapping the respective axes, and the electrical wiring is formed from the back side of the main body portion 241 to the wiring through holes of the first shaft portion 244. Through the wiring through hole of the third shaft portion 246, and enters into the inside of the second link portion 243 through the wiring through hole of the third shaft portion 246. In the second link part 243, a wiring space in which electric wiring can be laid is formed between the link part body 243a and the movement effecting part 243b.

<Second decoration device 233>
The second decoration device 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the second decoration device 233, FIG. 18 is a schematic front view of the second decoration device 233, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the second link portion 403. Note that, in FIG. 18, (a) shows the case where the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, and (b) shows the case where the second decoration device 233 is in the state between the retracted state and the effect state. , (C) show the case where the second decoration device 233 is in the rendering state, and in all of (a) to (c), the rotation rendering unit 403b is illustrated by a virtual line. Further, the height position of the axis of the second shaft portion 405 is shown as the uppermost position HB1 or the lowermost position LB1, and the height position of the lower end of the rack 493 is shown as the uppermost position HB2 or the lowermost position LB2. Further, in each of the enlarged views of (a) to (c), the positional relationship between the second shaft portion 405 and the hook hole 495 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the second decoration device 233 has a link mechanism like the first decoration device 232. The second decoration device 233 has a main body part 401 attached to the unit main body 231, and a first link part 402 and a second link part 403 rotatably provided with respect to the main body part 401. There is. In the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233, the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 rotate in association with each other with respect to the main body portion 401 as a fixed link. The second decoration device 233 corresponds to a rendering device that enhances the rendering effect by rotating the link portions 402 and 403. In the second decoration device 233, the first link portion 402 is arranged on the front surface side of the main body portion 401, and the second link portion 403 is arranged further on the front surface side of the first link portion 402.

  The main body portion 401 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape and extends along the vertical frame portion 231a of the unit main body 231 with its long side extending vertically. The main body portion 401 is attached to the front surface of the vertical frame portion 231a such that the thickness direction thereof is the front-back direction of the gaming machine. In this case, the main body portion 401 does not overlap with the central opening 72 of the game board 60a in the front and back, and is arranged at a position covered by the game board 60a from the front of the game machine. The main body 401 is attached to a vertical frame portion 231a of the pair of vertical frame portions 231a of the unit main body 231, which is different from the main body portion 241 of the first decoration device 232. Further, in the vertical direction, the length dimension of the main body portion 401 is larger than the length dimension of the main body portion 241 of the first decoration device 232.

  The first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 extend along the front surface of the main body portion 401. The first link portion 402 is connected to the main body portion 401 via the first shaft portion 404 (see FIGS. 18 and 20). The first link portion 402 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged such that the thickness direction thereof is the thickness direction of the main body portion 401. The longitudinal dimension of the first link portion 402 is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the first link portion 242 of the first decoration device 232. In this case, the distance between the first shaft portion 404 and the second shaft portion 405 is larger than the distance between the first shaft portion 244 and the second shaft portion 245 in the first decoration device 232.

  The first shaft portion 404 is a fixed shaft fixed to each of the main body portion 401 and the first link portion 402. In the present embodiment, the first shaft portion 404 is a convex portion that projects from the first link portion 402 toward the main body portion 401 (see FIG. 20), and is in a state of entering the concave portion 404 a formed in the main body portion 401. It is fixed to the first link portion 402. In this case, the first shaft portion 404 connects the upper end portion of the main body portion 401 and one end portion of the first link portion 402.

  The second link portion 403 is connected to the main body portion 401 via the second shaft portion 405, and is also connected to the first link portion 402 via the third shaft portion 406 (see FIGS. 18 and 19). The second shaft portion 405 is fixed to the second link portion 403, while being slidable with respect to the main body portion 401. The second shaft portion 405 is attached to the tip of the portion of the second link portion 403 that projects toward the main body portion 401.

  The second link part 403 includes a link part body 403a provided with a second shaft part 405 and a third shaft part 406, a rotation effecting part 403b rotatably provided with respect to the link part body 403a, and a link part body. It has a link portion decorative body 403c attached to the front surface side of 403a and an auxiliary display portion 403d attached to the side surface of the link portion main body 403a. The link portion main body 403a extends along the front surface of the main body portion 401 from the second shaft portion 405 beyond the third shaft portion 406, and the second shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406 serve as shafts for the main body portion 401 and It is possible to rotate with respect to the first link portion 402. The link body 403a is formed into an elongated arm shape as a whole, and corresponds to a production arm. The second shaft portion 405 corresponds to the arm shaft portion.

  The rotation effect part 403b is formed in an elongated shape, and has a shape and a color imitating a bone. Further, in the rotation effect production unit 403b, characters (for example, "Bowwow") are arranged so as to overlap the bone-like portion. The rotation effect part 403b is arranged on the front side of the link part body 403a, and with the rotation of the link part body 403a (the operation of the link mechanism), the retracted position PB1 (see FIG. 6) and the effect position PB2 (FIG. 4). See) and move to. The retreat position PB1 and the effect position PB2 are arranged side by side in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the second shaft portion 405.

  The second decoration device 233 can enhance the effect by moving the rotation effect unit 403b from the retracted position PB1 to the effect position PB2. Further, the second decoration device 233 moves to the retracted state when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the retreat position PB1, and moves to the effect state when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. become.

  The rotation effect unit 403b is connected to the link unit body 403a via the effect shaft unit 407. The effect shaft portion 407 is fixed to each of the link body 403a and the rotation effect portion 403b. In the present embodiment, the effect shaft portion 407 is a convex portion that protrudes from the rotation effect portion 403b toward the link portion main body 403a, and is inserted into the concave portion 407a formed in the link portion main body 403a to the link portion main body 403a. It is fixed. In this case, the effect shaft part 407 connects the end of the link part body 403a opposite to the second shaft part 405 and the central part of the rotation effect part 403b. The effect shaft portion 407 is arranged at a position overlapping the center of gravity of the rotation effect portion 403b. In addition, in the link body 403a, a concave portion 407a is formed by denting the tip end surface of the portion protruding toward the rotation effecting portion 403b.

  It should be noted that the rotation effecting unit 403b is displaced by rotating about the effecting shaft unit 407 even when the link units 402 and 403 are not rotated, but in the present embodiment, it is moved to the effecting position PB2. Even if the rotation effect unit 403b is rotating, if the position of the effect shaft unit 407 does not change, the rotation effect unit 403b is in the effect position PB2.

  The auxiliary display unit 403d is capable of enhancing the effect by being visually recognized even when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1. Characters such as "WAOON" are displayed on the auxiliary display portion 403d, and are arranged at a position that can be read from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1.

  Similarly to the first decoration device 232, the second shaft portion 405 is fixed to the link portion main body 403a of the second link portion 403, and is movable along the plate surface of the main body portion 401. In the second link portion 403, the second shaft portion 405 is fixed to the end portion of the link portion main body 403a. When the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the link portion main body 403a extends upward with the second shaft portion 405 side as the lower end. The second shaft portion 405 is attached to the tip of the portion of the link portion body 403a that projects toward the body portion 401.

  The third shaft portion 406 is a moving shaft portion that is fixed to each of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 and that moves as the link portions 402 and 403 rotate. In the present embodiment, the third shaft portion 406 is a convex portion that projects from the link portion main body 403a of the second link portion 403 toward the first link portion 402 (see FIG. 19), and is formed on the first link portion 402. It is fixed to the first link portion 402 in a state of entering the recessed portion 406a. The third shaft portion 406 is arranged at the end of the first link portion 402 on the opposite side to the first shaft portion 404, while being arranged at the intermediate position of the second link portion 403. In this case, the third shaft portion 406 is arranged between the second shaft portion 405 and the effect shaft portion 407 in the longitudinal direction of the link body 403a.

  Each axis of the first shaft portion 404, the second shaft portion 405, the third shaft portion 406, and the effect shaft portion 407 is in the thickness direction of the second decoration device 233 (main body portion 401, first link portion 402, and second link portion). 403) in the overlapping direction). In this case, the first link part 402 and the second link part 403 rotate along the front surface of the main body part 401 about the shaft parts 404 to 406. Further, the rotation effect part 403b rotates around the effect shaft part 407 along the front surface of the second link part 403.

  In the second decoration device 233, the second shaft portion 405 slides vertically along the main body portion 401, so that the rotation effect portion 403b can move in the gaming machine width direction (horizontal direction). The second shaft portion 405 is movable in a predetermined range below the first shaft portion 404, and the rotation effecting portion 403b, as shown in FIG. The portion 405 is in the retracted position PB1 because it is in the lowermost position LB1 in the movement range, and the second shaft portion 405 is moved to the uppermost position HB1 in the movement range as shown in FIG. 18 (c). Will move to the effect position PB2.

  The rotation effect unit 403b is in a state of being hidden behind the back surface of the game board 60a when it is in the retracted position PB1, and the side surface (auxiliary display unit 403d) on the first decoration device 232 side is visually recognized from the front of the game machine. It is possible (see Fig. 5). Further, in this case, the portion other than the rotation effecting unit 403b in the second link unit 403 (for example, the link unit body 403a) and the first link unit 402 are also hidden behind the game board 60a, and the rotation effecting unit. Only the side surface of 403b is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  The effect position PB2 is a position closer to the first decoration device 232 than the retracted position PB1 and is an intermediate position between the pair of vertical frame portions 231a of the unit main body 231. When the rotation effecting unit 403b is in the effecting position PB2, the rotation effecting unit 403b is exposed in front of the display screen 75a, and almost the entire area can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (see FIG. 4). In this case, unlike the first decoration device 232, in the second decoration device 233, in addition to the rotation effect part 403b, the first link part 402 and the link part decoration body 403c are also exposed in front of the gaming machine. There is. Therefore, the first link portion 402 and the link portion decorative body 403c are provided with a decoration for covering the internal structure of the first link portion 402 and the link portion main body 403a from the front of the gaming machine.

  In the second decoration device 233, the movement range of the rotation effect part 403b is set by structurally limiting the movement range of the second shaft part 405, whereby the rotation effect part 403b moves to the retracted position PB1. It is possible to move to and from the effect position PB2.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the main body portion 401 has a main body guide portion 411 that guides the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 405. The second shaft portion 405 can move along the main body guide portion 411 while being held in the main body guide portion 411 while keeping the orientation of the axis line. The main body guide portion 411 linearly extends in the vertical direction along the front surface of the main body portion 401 between a position spaced downward from the first shaft portion 404 and a position spaced upward from the lower end of the main body portion 401. ing.

  The first shaft portion 404 is arranged on an extension line of the main body guide portion 411. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 moves in a direction intersecting with the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 405 (game machine width direction) along with the rotation of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403. It will be.

<Movement of link units 402 and 403>
As shown in FIG. 18A, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the third shaft portion 406 overlaps the main body guide portion 411 in the front-rear direction (on the movement trajectory of the second shaft portion 405). It is located in. In this case, as in the case where the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, the second shaft portion 405 is located at or near the bottom dead center in the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233, and this position is the lowest position. It is set to LB1. The main body guide portion 411 extends below the position where the second shaft portion 405 exists when it is at the lowermost position LB1. In the present embodiment, when the second shaft portion 405 reaches the lower end portion of the main body guide portion 411, it means that the second shaft portion 405 has moved to the lowermost position LB1.

  Then, when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2, as with the case where the first decoration device 232 moves to the effect position PA2, with the rotation of the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403, The third shaft portion 406 moves toward the central opening 72 side (first decoration device 232 side), and the second shaft portion 405 moves upward (first shaft portion 404).

  As shown in FIG. 18C, when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2, the first shaft unit 404 similarly to when the movement effect unit 243b of the first decoration device 232 moves to the effect position PA2. At a lower position, the second shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406 are arranged side by side. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is arranged at substantially the same height position as the third shaft portion 406 or at a position slightly higher than this, and this position is referred to as the uppermost position HB1. Further, in this case, the third shaft portion 406 is at a position most apart from the main body guide portion 411 (movement locus of the second shaft portion 405) in the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233.

  The second shaft portion 405 is restricted from moving above the uppermost position HB1. The main body guide portion 411 has a lift stopper 412 that restricts the second shaft portion 405 from rising above the uppermost position HB1, and when the rotation rendering portion 403b is at the rendering position PB2, the second shaft portion 405 is The lift stopper 412 is hooked from below.

  When the second shaft portion 405 is at the uppermost position HB1, the first link portion 402 connects the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406 to the first straight line M1 and the second link portion 403 is the second straight line M1. The second straight line M2 connecting the shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406 intersects. At the intersection of the first straight line M1 and the second straight line M2, the link angle β between the first shaft portion 404 and the second shaft portion 405 is smaller than 90 degrees. It should be noted that the second straight line M2 is not orthogonal to the tangent line of the curve drawn by the third shaft portion 406 as a movement trajectory along with the rotation of the first link portion 402. The link angle β corresponds to the intersection angle between the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403.

  Here, when an external force is applied to the first link part 402 in a direction in which the rotation effect part 403b moves to the retracted position PB1 (retracted direction), the external force is also applied to the second shaft part 405 in a direction to raise it. However, since the rising of the second shaft portion 405 is restricted by the lift stopper 412, the second shaft portion 405 is held at the uppermost position HB1. In this case, since the link angle β is smaller than 90 degrees, an external force is applied to the second link portion 403 in the direction in which the second shaft portion 405 moves downward (the direction away from the first shaft portion 404). Unless the link parts 402 and 403 are rotated, the rotation effect part 403b is also held at the effect position PB2.

  Here, the rotation effect part 403b appears from the back side of the game board 60a to the front of the display screen 75a by moving from the retracted position PB1 toward the effect position PB2, but the second shaft part 405 is the highest position. When moving to the first shaft 404 side beyond HB1, as the second shaft 405 approaches the first shaft 404, the rotation effecting unit 403b again moves in a direction hidden behind the game board 60a. .. Therefore, the lift stopper 412 has a function of holding the rotation effect portion 403b in a state where the front exposed portion of the display screen 75a is the largest.

  The second link portion 403 has a protruding portion 431 that protrudes from the third shaft portion 406 toward the side opposite to the first shaft portion 404. The projecting portion 431 is configured to include each of a link body 403a, a rotation rendering unit 403b, a link decoration body 403c, and an auxiliary display unit 403d, and the rendering shaft portion 407 is a tip portion (third shaft) of the projecting portion 431. It is arranged at the end opposite to the second shaft portion 405 with the portion 406 interposed therebetween. Therefore, when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the second link unit 403 does not have the protruding portion 431, the effect shaft unit 407 (rotation effect unit The separation distance of 403b) becomes large. As a result, the presence of the rotation effect unit 403b that has moved to the effect position PA2 can be increased.

<Link drive unit 442>
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the second decoration device 233 has a link drive unit 442 that drives the second link unit 403 to rotate. The link drive unit 442 is a motor such as a stepping motor having a rotation shaft unit, and the rotation of the rotation shaft unit allows the second shaft unit 405 to move along the main body guide unit 411. .. The link drive part 442 is attached to the main body part 401 in a state of protruding to the back side of the main part 401. The link drive unit 442 corresponds to the arm drive unit and the slide drive unit.

  The link drive unit 442 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions, and the rotation effect unit 403b causes the rotation effect unit 403b to rotate by a predetermined effect angle (for example, 480 degrees) so that the rotation effect unit 403b and the effect position PB2. The link portions 402 and 403 are rotated by an angle required to move between the link portions 402 and 403.

<Spring member 451>
Similarly to the first decoration device 232, the second decoration device 233 uses the spring member 451 as the urging means for urging the link parts 402 and 403 in the direction in which the rotation effect part 403b moves to the effect position PB2 (effect direction). Have The spring member 451 is a kind of coil spring that extends linearly, and is a tension spring that exerts a biasing force in a contracting direction in a pulled state. The spring member 451 assists the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 by the link driving portion 442. When the biasing force of the spring member 451 is applied to the link portions 402 and 403, the link driving portion 442 is driven, for example. As compared with the case where the link parts 402 and 403 are rotated only by the force, the acceleration and the maximum speed at which the link parts 402 and 403 start to rotate are increased.

  The spring member 451 is connected to the first link portion 402 and the main body portion 401 in a pulled state. The first link portion 402 has a link side hooking portion 452 to which one end of the spring member 451 is hooked, and the main body portion 401 has a main body side hooking portion 453 to which the other end of the spring member 451 is hooked. The spring member 451 is provided so as to be stretched over the link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453. The link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453 are positions where the separation distance between the hooking portions 452 and 453 becomes closer as the first link portion 402 rotates in the direction in which the rotation effecting portion 403b moves to the effecting position PB2. It is located in.

  The length dimension of the spring member 451 is smaller than the distance between the link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453. Therefore, in the spring member 451, the direction in which the link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453 approach each other until the rotation effecting unit 403b moves to the effecting position PB2 (direction in which the rotation effecting unit 403b moves to the effecting position PB2). Then, the urging force is continuously applied to the first link portion 402.

  The main body side hooking portion 453 is provided on the side opposite to the appearance direction (production position PB2) of the rotation effecting portion 403b with the main body guiding portion 411 interposed therebetween, and is horizontally arranged on the main body guiding portion 411 in the width direction of the main body portion 401. It is arranged. The main body side hooking portion 453 has a convex portion protruding from the main body portion 401 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end portion of the spring member 451 is fixed by a screw or the like in a state of being hooked on the convex portion. .. In this case, the spring member 451 is rotatable along the front surface of the main body portion 401 about the convex portion of the main body side hooking portion 453 as an axis.

  The first link portion 402 has a bulging portion 454 that bulges toward the side opposite to the effect position PB2 in the direction intersecting the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406 (direction substantially orthogonal). The bulging portion 454 has a link side hooking portion 452. The link side hooking portion 452 has a convex portion protruding from the bulging portion 454 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end portion of the spring member 451 is fixed to the convex portion by a screw or the like in a hooked state. There is. In this case, the spring member 451 is rotatable along the front surface of the bulging portion 454 with the convex portion of the link side hooking portion 452 as an axis.

  The bulging portion 454 bulges along the front surface of the main body portion 241 in the first link portion 402 from the first shaft portion 404 in a direction intersecting with the first link portion 402 (width direction of the main body portion 401). There is. The link side hooking portion 452 is arranged at the tip of the bulging portion 454, and the bulging dimension of the bulging portion 454 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 401. That is, the distance between the first shaft portion 404 and the link side hooking portion 452 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 401.

  The spring member 451 is in a state of vertically extending along the front surface of the main body portion 401 on the side opposite to the appearance direction of the rotation effecting portion 403b with the main body guiding portion 411 interposed therebetween. Here, since the turning radius of the link-side hooking portion 452 is set as large as possible, that is, substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 401, the movement of the link-side hooking portion 452 accompanying the turning of the first link portion 402. The direction is almost limited to the vertical direction.

  Further, the fact that the turning radius of the link side hooking portion 452 is made as large as possible means that the urging force of the spring member 451 is used as the rotative force for rotating the first link portion 402, the turning force is increased. It will also increase. Here, when the first shaft portion 404 is the fulcrum, the link side hooking portion 452 is the force point, and the third shaft portion 406 is the action point, the distance between the fulcrum and the point of action is the distance between the fulcrum and the point of force. Since the ratio is increased as much as possible, the urging force of the spring member 451 can maximize the acceleration and maximum speed at which the links 402 and 403 start rotating.

<Main body 401>
The second decoration device 233 has a link transmission portion 462 that transmits the driving force of the link drive portion 442 to the second link portion 403 (second shaft portion 405), and the link transmission portion 462 is mounted on the main body portion 401. ing. The link transmission part 462 has a link gear 491 fixed to the rotary shaft part of the link drive part 442. The rotation axis of the link gear 491 extends along the rotation axis portion of the link drive portion 442 along the thickness direction of the main body portion 401, and is arranged in front of the main body portion 401. In this case, the rotary shaft portion of the link drive portion 442 projects from the main body portion 401 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the link gear 491 is fixed to the projecting portion.

  The second decoration device 233 includes an upper cover body 465 that covers the first shaft portion 404 and the link side hooking portion 452 from the front of the gaming machine in the upper portion of the main body portion 401, and a link gear 491 and the main body side in the lower portion of the main body portion 401. It has a lower cover body 466 that covers the hooking portion 453 from the front side of the gaming machine, and an upper decoration body 467 attached to the front surface of the upper cover body 465.

  The second decoration device 233 has a reverse rotation stopper 469 that restricts the second link portion 403 from rotating toward the side opposite to the effect position PB2 when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1. is doing. The reverse rotation stopper 469 is a convex portion that protrudes from the lower cover body 466 toward the front of the gaming machine, and is arranged on the opposite side of the performance position PB2 with the second link portion 403 interposed therebetween. Here, in the second decoration device 233, since the second shaft portion 405 exists at the bottom dead center when the rotation effecting portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the second link portion 403 is urged by the spring member 451. May rotate toward the side opposite to the effect position PB2. On the other hand, the side surface of the lower part of the second link portion 403 opposite to the presentation position PB2 contacts the reverse rotation stopper 469, so that a straight line connecting the first shaft portion 404 and the second shaft portion 405 is formed. The movement of the third shaft portion 406 to the side opposite to the effect position PB2 is restricted.

  In the second decoration device 233, in addition to the reverse rotation stopper 469, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the second link unit 403 rotates toward the side opposite to the effect position PB2. It is also regulated by the upper cover body 465. The upper cover body 465 has a portion overlapping at least a part of the second link portion 403 in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401, and the side surface of the upper portion of the second link portion 403 opposite to the effect position PB2 is the upper portion. By contacting the cover body 465, the second link portion 403 is restricted from rotating in the reverse direction while the rotation effect portion 403b is in the retracted position PB1. In this case, in the second link portion 403, the reverse rotation stopper 469 is hooked on the lower portion thereof and the upper cover body 465 is hooked on the upper portion thereof.

  The reverse rotation stopper 269 corresponds to a first stopper that comes into contact with a portion of the link body 403a of the second link portion 403 between the third shaft portion 406 and the first shaft portion 404, and the upper cover body 465. Corresponds to a second stopper that comes into contact with a portion of the link portion main body 403a opposite to the second shaft portion 405 with the third shaft portion 406 interposed therebetween. Further, the reverse rotation stopper 469 and the upper cover body 465 form a reverse rotation restricting means.

<Second link unit 403>
The second decoration device 233 has an effect drive unit 475 that is driven to rotate the rotation effect unit 403b. The performance drive unit 475 is a motor such as a stepping motor having a rotation shaft unit, and the rotation performance unit 403b can be rotated with the rotation of the rotation shaft unit. The performance drive unit 475 is attached to the second link unit 403 in a state of protruding to the front side of the second link unit 403. The performance drive unit 475 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions, and the rotation performance unit 403b rotates in accordance with the rotation direction of the performance drive unit 475.

  The link drive unit 442 and the performance drive unit 475 have different drive performances. Regarding the rated value of the drive torque, the link drive section 442 is larger than that of the performance drive section 475, and regarding the rated value of the drive speed (rotational speed of the rotary shaft section), the performance drive section 475 is linked to the link drive section 442. Has been bigger than. In this case, the link driving unit 442 needs to have a sufficiently large driving torque because it needs to exert a driving force necessary for rotating the link units 402 and 403. On the other hand, the performance drive unit 475 does not need to exert an excessively large drive torque as long as the rotation performance unit 403b can be rotated, and in order to increase the difference between the maximum speed and the minimum speed with respect to the rotation of the rotation performance unit 403b. It has a maximum rated speed as much as possible. The link drive unit 442 corresponds to the arm drive unit.

  The effect drive unit 475 is arranged at a position closer to the second shaft portion 405 in the longitudinal direction of the second link portion 403. In this case, the effect drive unit 475 is on the opposite side of the effect shaft section 407 with the third shaft section 406 in between in the longitudinal direction of the second link section 403, that is, between the second shaft section 405 and the third shaft section 406. It is located in between. The effect drive unit 475 is covered with the link portion decorative body 403c from the front side of the gaming machine, and cannot be seen from the front side of the gaming machine regardless of the rotating state of the second link portion 403. The performance driving unit 475 is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second link unit 403 with the performance driving unit 475 and the rotation performance unit 403b.

  The second decoration device 233 has an effect transmission unit 476 that transmits the driving force of the effect drive unit 475 to the rotation effect unit 403b. As shown in FIG. 19, the effect transmission unit 476 is mounted on the second link unit 403. The link portion main body 403a of the second link portion 403 has a front case body 481 forming the front surface thereof and a back case body 482 forming the back surface thereof, and the performance transmission between these case bodies 481 and 482. The part 476 is stored. The front case body 481 and the rear case body 482 are fixed to each other with screws or the like in a state of being overlapped with each other in the thickness direction.

  The case bodies 481 and 482 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the effect transmission portion 476 disposed between the case bodies 481 and 482 is visible through the case bodies 481 and 482. .. In this case, since the internal structure of the link body 403a including the effect transmission portion 476 is visible, maintenance work of the link body 403a is facilitated.

  The production transmission unit 476 transmits the driving force from the rotation gear 484 fixed to the rotation shaft of the production drive unit 475, the production gear 485 fixed to the production shaft 407, and the production gear 485 from the rotation gear 484. And a plurality of transmission gears 486. The gears 484 to 486 are arranged along the plate surface of the link body 403a with their respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the second link portion 403. The rotation gear 484 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotation shaft portion of the effect drive unit 475.

  The plurality of transmission gears 486 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the link body 403a between the rotation gear 484 and the effect gear 485. These transmission gears 486 include a gear that meshes with the rotation gear 484 and a gear that meshes with the effect gear 485. The transmission gears 486 and the effect gear 485 rotate as the rotation gear 484 rotates. It is a driven gear.

  The plurality of transmission gears 486 include a layered gear 486a provided at a position overlapping the third shaft portion 406. The overlapping gear 486a is provided with its axis aligned with the axis of the third shaft 406, and is rotatable relative to the third shaft 406. In this case, regardless of the state of the third shaft portion 406 (the angle of the second link portion 403 with respect to the first link portion 402, etc.), the overlapping gear 486a rotates in accordance with the driving of the effect driving portion 475.

  The second link unit 403 is provided with an effect sensor 487 that detects a rotation angle of the rotation effect unit 403b with respect to the link unit body 403a. The effect gear 485 has a detected part 487a which is a detection target of the effect sensor 487, and the effect sensor 487 can detect that the detected part 487a is at a predetermined position. The effect sensor 487 is arranged on the back side of the effect gear 485, and the detected portion 487a is a convex portion protruding from the effect gear 485 in the radial direction. The effect sensor 487 can detect the angle of the rotation effect part 403b in a state where the longitudinal direction of the rotation effect part 403b overlaps the longitudinal direction of the link body 403a as a zero angle. When the rotation effect unit 403b is at a zero angle, the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the arrangement direction of the second shaft unit 405 and the third shaft unit 406.

<Operation of rotation effect unit 403b>
In the second decoration device 233, the production drive unit 475 is driven in accordance with the drive of the link drive unit 442, so that the rotation production unit 403b is moved faster toward the production position PB2. Here, the relationship between the rotation of the link parts 402 and 403 and the rotation of the rotation effect part 403b will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect unit 403b is in a state of vertically extending along the main body unit 401 at the retracted position PB1. In this case, the rotation effect part 403b is at a zero angle with respect to the link part body 403a, and almost the entire part is in a state of overlapping the body part 401, the first link part 402, and the like in the front-rear direction. In the rotation effect part 403b at the zero angle, one end of the rotation effect part 403b is the upper end part and the other end is the lower end part, and the upper end part projects above the link part body 403a. In this state, the first shaft portion 404 is arranged at a position overlapping front and rear. Further, the lower end portion is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the third shaft portion 406.

  The second decoration device 233 shifts to the effect state by driving both the link drive unit 442 and the effect drive unit 475. In this case, the link drive unit 442 drives the rotation effecting unit 403b in a direction (normal rotation) to move it to the effect position PB2, and the effect driving unit 475 causes the upper end of the rotation effecting unit 403b to be on the effect position PB2 side (first decoration). It is driven in a direction (forward rotation) to move it to the device 232 side).

  As shown in FIG. 18B, in the second link portion 403, when the link drive portion 442 and the effect drive portion 475 start driving, the upper end portion (effect shaft portion 407) of the link body 403a is in the effect position. While moving toward the PB2 side, the upper end portion of the rotation effect unit 403b moves toward the effect position PB2 side. In this case, a force (rotational force of the rotation effecting unit 403b) that the upper end of the rotation effecting unit 403b moves toward the effecting position PB2 is applied to the effecting shaft unit 407, and the rotation speed causes the moving speed of the effecting shaft unit 407 ( The rotation speed of the link body 403a is increased.

  The production drive unit 475 rotates the rotation production unit 403b once with respect to the link body 403a until the rotation production unit 403b moves to the production position PB2. In this case, the rotary shaft of the link drive unit 442 rotates by 480 degrees, while the rotary shaft of the effect drive unit 475 rotates by 360 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, the effect production drive unit 475 can rotate the rotational effect production unit 403b by continuously driving even after the rotational effect production unit 403b has moved to the effect position PB2. There is. In this case, the rotation effect unit 403b appears in front of the display screen 75a while rotating, and further, the rotation effect unit 403b continues to rotate, so that the effect effect of the rotation effect unit 403b can be enhanced.

<Link transmission unit 462>
Next, the configuration of the link transmission unit 462 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the main body 401. 20. FIG. 20 is a view of the main body 401 as viewed from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the main body 401 on which the link transmission part 462 is mounted has a front case body 488 forming the front surface thereof and a back case body 489 forming the back surface thereof. 462 is arranged between the case bodies 488 and 489 and on the front side of the front case body 488. The front case body 488 and the rear case body 489 are fixed to each other by screws or the like in a state of being overlapped with each other in the thickness direction.

  The case bodies 488 and 489 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the link transmission portion 462 and the like arranged between the case bodies 488 and 489 are visible through the case bodies 488 and 489. There is. In this case, since the internal structure of the main body 401 including the case bodies 488 and 489 is visible, the maintenance work of the main body 401 is easy.

  The link transmission unit 462 includes, in addition to the link gear 491, a pinion gear 492 that rotates in conjunction with the link gear 491, a rack 493 that performs linear motion in association with the rotational movement of the pinion gear 492, and the pinion gear 491. It has transmission gears 494a and 494b for transmitting the driving force to the gear 492. The link gear 491, the pinion gear 492, and the transmission gears 494a and 494b are arranged along the plate surface of the main body 401 with their respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the main body 401. The rack 493 is a long plate member that extends along the plate surface of the main body portion 401, and has a plurality of teeth arranged along the long sides thereof.

  In the link transmission portion 462, the link gear 491 is arranged on the front side of the front case body 488, while the pinion gear 492 and the rack 493 are housed between the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489. .. Here, the transmission gear 494a is arranged on the front side of the front case body 488 and meshes with the link gear 491, and the transmission gear 494b is arranged between the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489, and is connected to the pinion gear. It meshes with 492. The transmission gears 494a and 494b are connected to each other by rotating shafts with their axes aligned with each other, and the connecting portion penetrates the front case body 488.

  The link gear 491 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotating shaft of the link drive unit 442, and the pinion gear 492 and the transmission gears 494a and 494b are driven gears that rotate as the link gear 491 rotates. .. Further, the rack 493 is a driven rack that linearly moves as the pinion gear 492 rotates.

  The rack 493 is arranged so as to extend along the longitudinal direction of the main body guide portion 411, and is a moving member that moves along the main body guide portion 411. In this case, the rack 493 is arranged on the back side of the main body guide portion 411 with the front case body 488 of the main body portion 401 interposed therebetween. The main body 401 has a guide groove (not shown) that guides the moving direction of the rack 493, and the rack 493 is provided in a state of being inserted in the guide groove. The guide groove is provided in the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489 of the main body 401, and is formed by recessing the inner side surfaces of the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489. The guide groove extends along the main body guide portion 411.

  The second shaft portion 405 is connected to the rack 493 via the main body guide portion 411, and the second shaft portion 405 moves along the main body guide portion 411 when the rack 493 slides. The main body guide portion 411 is formed by a main body elongated hole 411a formed in the front case body 488 of the main body portion 401, and the second shaft portion 405 is provided in the front case body 488 without being separated from the main body elongated hole 411a. It is installed.

  The movable range of the second shaft portion 405 is limited in the vertical direction by the main body elongated hole 411a. Among the inner peripheral surfaces of the main body elongated hole 411a, the ceiling surface 411b facing downward is for restricting the second shaft portion 405, which abuts from below, from moving above the uppermost position HB1. The stopper 412 is this ceiling surface 411b. The bottom surface 411c that faces upward is a lowering regulation portion that regulates the movement of the second shaft portion 405 that comes into contact with the lower portion below the lowermost position LB1. As described above, since the second shaft portion 405 is at the bottom dead center or a position close to the bottom dead center when it is at the lowermost position LB1, the second shaft portion 405 is below the lowermost position LB1 even if the lowering is not restricted by the bottom surface 411c. It is also possible that they will not move to.

  The main body elongated hole 411a penetrates the front case body 488 in the front-rear direction, and the rack 493 is formed with a hook hole 495 into which the second shaft portion 405 is inserted from the front. The hook hole 495 is a long hole extending along the moving direction of the rack 493, and penetrates the rack 493 in the front-rear direction. The second shaft portion 405 can move together with the rack 493 in a state of being hooked on the rack 493 inside the main body portion 401.

  The second shaft portion 405 is inserted into the main body elongated hole 411a and the hooking hole 495, and is provided in a state where the main body guide portion 411 and the rack 493 are sandwiched from the front and rear. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is hooked on the front surface of the front case body 488 from the front and the front shaft piece 405a inserted into the main body elongated hole 411a, and the back surface of the rack 493 while being hooked from the rear. It has a rear side shaft piece 405b inserted into the hole 495, and these front side shaft piece 405a and rear side shaft piece 405b are fixed by screws or the like.

  The hook hole 495 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main body guide portion 411 (main body long hole 411a) in the width direction of the main body portion 401. The width dimension of the hook hole 495 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body elongated hole 411a. The length dimension of the hooking hole 495 is smaller than the length dimension of the main body elongated hole 411a, but is larger than the vertical dimension of the entry portion of the second shaft portion 405. Therefore, the second shaft portion 405 can be moved up and down relatively with respect to the hook hole 495 while being inserted into the hook hole 495.

  In the rack 493, of the inner peripheral surface of the hook hole 495, the side surface extending in the vertical direction serves as a limiting means for limiting the moving direction of the second shaft portion 405 in the vertical direction. Further, among the inner peripheral surfaces of the hook holes 495, the ceiling surface 495a facing downward is a downward pressing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 405 downward when the rack 493 moves downward, and The facing bottom surface 495b is an upward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 405 upward when the rack 493 moves upward.

  When the second shaft portion 405 moves upward, the rotation effect unit 403b moves toward the effect position PB2. Therefore, the bottom surface 495b has the second axis in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. The ceiling surface 495a corresponds to a first pressing portion that presses the portion 405, and the ceiling surface 495a corresponds to a second pressing portion that presses the second shaft portion 405 in a direction in which the rotation effecting portion 403b returns to the retracted position PB1. The ceiling surface 495a and the bottom surface 495b face each other with the second shaft portion 405 interposed therebetween, and the distance between the ceiling surface 495a and the bottom surface 495b is set to be larger than the height dimension of the second shaft portion 405. Therefore, the second shaft portion 405 is not in a state of being in contact with both the ceiling surface 495a and the bottom surface 495b at the same time.

  The rack 493 is movable within a range in which at least a part of the hooking hole 495 overlaps with the main body elongated hole 411a in the front and back. When the rack 493 is located at the highest position HB2 which is the highest position in the movable range (see FIG. 22B), the rack 493 is placed between the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495 and the ceiling surface 411b of the main body elongated hole 411a. The biaxial portion 405 is sandwiched. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 pushed up by the rack 493 is retained at the uppermost position HB1 by being caught on the ceiling surface 411b of the main body elongated hole 411a, and the rack 493 is held more than the uppermost position HB2. The upward movement is restricted by the second shaft portion 405.

  Incidentally, since the rack 493 can slide relative to the second shaft portion 405, even when the second shaft portion 405 is at the uppermost position HB1, for example, the rack 493 is hooked from the uppermost position HB2 of the rack 493. The ceiling surface 495a of the hole 495 can be moved downward to a position where the ceiling surface 495a comes into contact with the second shaft portion 405.

  On the other hand, when the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 which is the lowest position in the movable range (see FIG. 18A), the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495 is substantially the same as the bottom surface 411c of the main body elongated hole 411a. It is in the height position. In this case, unlike the case where the second shaft portion 405 is placed on the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495 and the second shaft portion 405 is separated upward from the bottom surface 495b, the rack 493 is moved upward. The bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495 immediately pushes up the second shaft portion 405 by moving the second shaft portion 405. Further, this state can also be referred to as a state in which the rack 493 is moved to the lowest position LB2 by the second shaft portion 405 pushing down the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495.

  A rack sensor 497 that detects that the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 is attached to the main body 401. The rack 493 has a detected portion 498 that is a detection target of the rack sensor 497, and the rack sensor 497 detects that the detected portion 498 is at a predetermined position, so that the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2. Detect that there is. The rack sensor 497 is fixed to the front case body 488 of the main body 401 with a screw or the like while being arranged on the front side of the rack 493, and the detected portion 498 moves forward from the rack 493 toward the rack sensor 497. It is a protruding protrusion.

  The detected portion 498 is arranged below the hook hole 495 in the rack 493, and is detected by the rack sensor 497 when the rack 493 is in the lowermost position LB2, and the rack 493 is moved upward from the lowermost position LB2. If not detected. The detected portion 498 protrudes to the front surface side of the main body 401 through the main body elongated hole 411a, and the protruding portion is a portion detected by the rack sensor 497. A slit extending downward from the main body long hole 411a is formed in the front case body 488 of the main body portion 401, and when the rack 493 moves toward the lowermost position LB2, the detected portion 498 is It is detected by the rack sensor 497 by moving through the slit to a position below the bottom surface 411c of the long hole 411a.

  The detected portion 498 extends along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack 493 and has a predetermined length dimension in the vertical direction. This length is larger than the length of the detection range of the rack sensor 497 in the vertical direction. In this case, the rack sensor 497 can detect the detected portion 498 not only when the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2 but also when the rack 493 is at a position slightly higher than the lowermost position LB2. .. For example, in a configuration in which the length dimension of the detected portion 498 in the vertical direction is extremely small, the detected portion 498 exists at a position outside the detection range of the rack sensor 497 even though the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2. Therefore, there is a concern that the rack sensor 497 cannot detect the detected portion 498.

<Lock mechanism of second decoration device 233>
In the second decoration device 233, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 rotate in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. It has a retract lock mechanism that regulates As described above, in the second decoration device 233, since the rack 493 can move relatively to the second shaft portion 405, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, While the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowest position LB1, the rack 493 is not always at the lowest position LB2. The retracting lock mechanism uses this to restrict the movement of the second shaft portion 405 in the locked state when the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowermost position LB1 and the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2. Therefore, when the rack 493 is not at the lowermost position LB2 even when the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowermost position LB1, the lock of the second shaft portion 405 is released in the unlocked state.

  Here, this retract lock mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. 21A and 21B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the main body section 401. FIG. 21A shows the case where the rack 493 is in the lowermost position LB2, and FIG. 21B shows the case where the rack 493 is in the unlocked position LB3. Note that in FIG. 21, the height position of the lower end of the rack 493 is shown as an unlock position LB3.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first link portion 402 has a long plate-shaped arm member 402 a forming a main portion thereof and a bulging member 402 b forming a bulging portion 454. The bulging member 402b is attached to an end of the arm member 402a, extends in a direction intersecting with the arm member 402a, and the intersecting angle thereof is 90 degrees, for example. The arm member 402a and the bulging member 402b are fixed in a state of being stacked in the thickness direction of the arm member 402a, and in the first link portion 402, a portion where the arm member 402a and the bulging member 402b overlap. The first shaft portion 404 is disposed in the. The bulging member 402b has a convex portion that projects toward the main body portion 401, and the convex portion forms the first shaft portion 404.

  The main body part 401 has a rotation restricting member 511 that restricts the rotation of the first link part 402 by being hooked on the rack 493, and a connecting member 512 that connects the rotation restricting member 511 to the swelling member 402b. is doing. Both the rotation restricting member 511 and the connecting member 512 are housed between the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489. The rotation restricting member 511 corresponds to a rotating body that rotates with the rotation of the first link portion 402.

  The rotation restricting member 511 is arranged in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401 so as to overlap with the pinion gear 492 and to overlap with at least a part of the rack 493 irrespective of the position of the rack 493 that moves linearly. It is possible to rotate around the portion 513 (see FIG. 21) as an axis. The rotation restricting member 511 is arranged on the back side of the rack 493, and is separated from the rack 493 on the back case body 489 side. In this case, the rotation restricting member 511 is in a state of being inserted between the rear case body 489 and the rack 493.

  The regulation shaft portion 513 rotatably connects the rotation regulation member 511 to the rear case body 489, and the axis line of the regulation shaft portion 513 extends along the thickness direction of the main body portion 401. The regulation shaft portion 513 is a convex portion that protrudes from the rear case body 489 toward the rotation regulation member 511, and is fixed to the rotation regulation member 511 in a state where the regulation shaft portion 513 is inserted into a concave portion 513a formed in the rotation regulation member 511. Has been done. The rotation restricting member 511 rotates around the plate surface of the main body 401 with the restricting shaft 513 as an axis. The restriction shaft portion 513 is arranged at a position overlapping the main body guide portion 411 and the rack 493 in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401.

  The rotation restricting member 511 is formed in a plate shape as a whole, and extends along the inner surface of the rear case body 489. The rotation restricting member 511 has a restricting hooking portion 515 that can be hooked on the rack 493, and a restricting connecting portion 516 that is connected to the connecting member 512. The regulation hooking portion 515 and the regulation connecting portion 516 are arranged along the plate surface of the rotation regulation member 511 with respect to the regulation shaft portion 513, and both are arranged at positions separated from the regulation shaft portion 513. The restriction hook portion 515 and the restriction connection portion 516 are separated from the restriction shaft portion 513 in different directions.

  The straight line connecting the regulation hooking portion 515 and the regulation shaft portion 513 intersects with the straight line connecting the regulation connecting portion 516 and the regulation shaft portion 513, and the intersecting angle is set to 90 degrees, for example. The rotation restricting member 511 is formed in a fan shape as a whole, and a restricting connecting portion 516 is arranged on one end side of the arc and a restricting catching portion 515 is arranged on the other end side.

  In the rotation restricting member 511, the restricting hook portion 515 is arranged at a position above the restricting shaft portion 513, and the restricting connecting portion 516 is arranged at a lateral position of the restricting shaft portion 513. Here, the regulation catching portion 515 moves along a curve along the width direction of the main body portion 401 as the rotation regulating member 511 rotates. For example, when the rotation rendering unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the regulation hooking unit 515 is located at a position farthest from the connecting member 512 in the width direction of the main body unit 401 (position close to the rendering position PB2), and the rotation rendering. When the portion 403b is in the effect position PB2, it is in the position closest to the connecting member 512.

  On the other hand, the regulation connection portion 516 moves along a curve along the up-down direction as the rotation regulation member 511 rotates. For example, the restriction connection unit 516 is at the highest position when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, and is at the lowest position when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the effect position PB2.

  The connecting member 512 is a vertically long plate member that extends vertically along the rack 493. The connecting members 512 are arranged side by side on the rack 493 in the width direction of the main body 401. The connecting member 512 has its upper end rotatably connected to the bulging member 402b and its lower end rotatably connected to the rotation restricting member 511. The lower end of the connecting member 512 is connected to the restriction connecting portion 516 in a state of being superimposed on the front surface of the rotation restricting member 511. In this case, the rotation restricting member 511 is in a state of being inserted between the rear case body 489 and the connecting member 512.

  In addition, in the connecting portion between the rotation restricting member 511 and the connecting member 512, the restricting connecting portion 516 of the rotation restricting member 511 is a recessed portion that is recessed toward the side opposite to the connecting member 512, and is formed in the connecting member 512. The regulation connecting portion 516 is fixed to the connecting member 512 in a state in which the formed convex portion 516a enters the regulation connecting portion 516 (recessed portion).

  In addition, at the connecting portion between the connecting member 512 and the swelling member 402b, the upper end of the connecting member 512 is connected to the swelling member 402b in a state of being arranged on the back side of the swelling member 402b. The bulging member 402 b has a bulging connection portion 517 that penetrates through the front case body 488 and projects toward the connecting member 512, and the bulging connecting portion 517 is a recess formed in the connecting member 512 ( It is fixed to the connecting member 512 in a state of entering (not shown). The bulging connection portion 517 is arranged on the back side of the link side hooking portion 452 in the bulging portion 454. In this case, the bulging connection portion 517 is arranged at a position apart from the first shaft portion 404 in the direction intersecting the arrangement direction of the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406, and the first link portion It moves up and down as the 402 rotates.

  The front case body 488 has a connection hole 518 through which the bulging connection portion 517 is inserted. The connection hole 518 is a curved elongated hole that extends in the up-down direction along the trajectory drawn by the bulging connection portion 517 as the first link portion 402 rotates. The restriction connecting portion 516 of the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed below the bulging connecting portion 517, and the movement curves of the restricting connecting portion 516 and the bulging connecting portion 517 are substantially the same.

  In addition, in the first link portion 402, the bulging connection portion 517 corresponds to a link displacement portion that is displaced along with the rotation of the first link portion 402. Further, in the rotation restricting member 511, the restricting connecting portion 516 corresponds to a rotating displacement part that is displaced along with the rotation of the rotation restricting member 511, and the restricting shaft portion 513 corresponds to a rotating shaft portion.

  In the rotation restricting member 511, the restricting hook portion 515 projects toward the back surface of the rack 493. The rack 493 has a rack receiving portion 521 to which the regulation hooking portion 515 can be hooked. The rack receiving portion 521 projects rearward from the rack 493 toward the rotation restricting member 511. The regulation catching portion 515 corresponds to the first displacing portion that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion 402, and the rack receiving portion 521 is the second displacing portion with the rotation of the second link portion 403. It corresponds to the displacement part.

  The rack receiving portion 521 has, as a side surface extending in the thickness direction of the rack 493, a receiving surface 521a on which the restriction hook portion 515 is hooked when the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2. The receiving surface 521a is a surface of the side surface of the rack receiving portion 521, which faces the side opposite to the connecting member 512 (the effect position PB2 side).

  As shown in FIG. 21A, when the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2, the rack receiving portion 521 is in a state of being inserted between the restricting hook portion 515 and the connecting member 512 in the width direction of the main body portion 401. The receiving surface 521a is arranged side by side on the regulation catching portion 515 along the movement trajectory of the regulation catching portion 515. Since the receiving surface 521a extends in the up-down direction, the receiving surface 521a is substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the restriction hook portion 515. In this case, the rotation of the rotation restricting member 511 is blocked by the contact of the restriction catching portion 515 with the receiving surface 521a, so that the first link portion 402 connected to the rotation restricting member 511 via the connecting member 512. Is also prevented from rotating.

  When the rack 493 moves upward, the receiving surface 521a moves to a position higher than the regulation hooking portion 515. As shown in FIG. 21B, when the rack 493 is in the unlocked position LB3, which is higher than the lowest position LB2, the regulation catching portion 515 causes the rack catching portion 515 to rotate as the rotation regulating member 511 rotates. Even if it moves laterally toward the 521 side, the regulation catching portion 515 is in a state of not catching on the receiving surface 521a. When the rack 493 is in the unlocked position LB3, the bottom position LB2 and the unlocked position LB3 are separated from each other in the vertical direction by the size of the gap between the hook hole 495 and the second shaft portion 405. However, the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowermost position LB1.

  Further, in the detected portion 498 of the rack 493, the length dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the distance between the lowest position LB2 and the unlock position LB3. Here, regardless of whether the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 or the unlock position LB3, the detected portion 498 is within the detection range of the rack sensor 497. That is, it is detected by the rack sensor 497. Therefore, the rack sensor 497 does not detect the detected portion 498 when the rack 493 moves to a position higher than the unlock position LB3.

  On the side surface of the rack receiving portion 521, the receiving surface 521a extends downward from the upper end of the rack receiving portion 521, and at the lower end of the receiving surface 521a, the rack 493 is regulated when moving downward. A guide surface 521b for guiding the connecting portion 516 toward the receiving surface 521a is connected. The guide surface 521b linearly extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the receiving surface 521a toward the connecting member 512 side. In this case, the width dimension of the rack receiving portion 521 is gradually reduced as it approaches the lower end as a whole. The guide surface 521b may be curved so as to bulge outside the rack receiving portion 521 in the width direction of the rack 493, or may be curved so as to be recessed inside.

  The rack receiving portion 521 moves from a position higher than the regulation connecting portion 516 to a position side by side with the regulation connecting portion 516 as the rack 493 moves toward the unlock position LB3 and the lowest position LB2. .. In this case, in the width direction of the rack 493, as long as the restriction connecting portion 516 enters the side opposite to the connecting member 512 with the rack receiving portion 521 interposed, the restriction connecting portion 516 moves along the guide surface 521b thereafter. By doing so, it is guided to the receiving surface 521a.

  In the second decoration device 233, the lock mechanism is configured to include the first link portion 402, the rack 493, the rotation restricting member 511, and the connecting member 512. The lock mechanism is in the locked state when the rack 493 is in the lowermost position LB2, and is in the unlocked state when the rack 493 is at a position higher than the unlocked position LB3. In this case, the lowest position LB2 of the rack 493 corresponds to the lock position.

<Operation of the second decoration device 233>
Next, an operation mode of the second decoration device 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18, 21, and 22. FIG. 22 is an operation diagram when the second decoration device 233 shifts from the effect state to the retracted state. In the enlarged view of FIG. 22, the positional relationship between the second shaft portion 405 and the hook hole 495 is shown.

<Appearance of rotation effect unit 403b>
First, in the second decoration device 233, a case where the rotation effect unit 403b moves from the retracted position PB1 toward the effect position PB2 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 21 (a), when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state (the rotation effect unit 403b is in the retracted position PB1) and the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2, The lock mechanism is in a locked state, and the rotation effect unit 403b is restricted from moving toward the effect position PB2. In this case, since the rotation restricting member 511 is hooked on the rack 493, the link parts 402 and 403 are prevented from rotating due to the biasing force of the spring member 451, and the rotation effect part 403b is displayed on the display screen 75a. It does not appear in front of.

  Here, since the rack 493 moves from the lowermost position LB2 to the unlocked position LB3 while the second shaft portion 405 does not move from the lowermost position LB1 according to the driving of the link driving unit 442, the lock mechanism is used. Since the unlocking and the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 are sequentially performed, not simultaneously, the link portions 402 and 403 rapidly start to rotate after the unlocking. In this case, since the rotation effecting unit 403b suddenly starts moving from the retracted position PB1 toward the effect position PB2, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by causing the rotation effecting unit 403b to appear in front of the display screen 75a.

  On the other hand, for example, in the configuration in which the second shaft portion 405 is also pushed up when the rack 493 moves from the lowermost position LB2 to the unlocked position LB3, the link portions 402 and 403 are released while unlocking. It will start to rotate slowly.

  The second decoration device 233 shifts to the effect state by driving the link drive unit 442 in the normal rotation. Here, when the link unit 402 starts driving, the rack 493 moves from the lowermost position LB2 to the unlock position LB3 as shown in FIG. 21B, whereby the rotation restricting member 511 is caught by the rack 493. Is released and the lock mechanism shifts to the unlocked state.

  When the lock mechanism shifts to the unlocked state, the biasing force of the spring member 451 is applied to the first link portion 402 in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. Further, the rack 493 moves upward beyond the lock release position LB3 to push up the second shaft portion 405 while hooking the second shaft portion 405 on the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495, and the second shaft portion 405 moves to the lowest position LB1. Move upward from. Due to these, the rotation of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 is started by both the biasing force of the spring member 451 and the driving force of the link driving portion 442.

  Here, the rack sensor 497 detects the detected portion 498 of the rack 493 until the rack 493 reaches the lock release position LB3 from the lowest position LB2, and the rack 493 moves above the lock release position LB3. In this case, the detected portion 498 is not detected. Therefore, the rack sensor 497 can detect that the rack 493 has moved upward beyond the unlock position LB3 (the lock mechanism has shifted to the unlocked state), and the rack sensor 497 unlocks the lock. When is detected, the performance drive unit 475 is driven.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the rotation effect unit 403b is rotated in a direction to accelerate the rotation of the second link unit 403 by driving the effect driving unit 475, the biasing force of the spring member 451 and Since the rotational force of the rotation effecting unit 403b is added to the driving force of the link driving unit 442, the moving speed of the rotation effecting unit 403b (the rotation speed of the link units 402 and 403 is higher than that of the configuration in which the rotation effecting unit 403b does not rotate, for example. ) Becomes larger.

  Here, after the link driving unit 442 starts driving, the rotation driving unit 403b avoids rotating at the retreat position PB1 by starting driving after the lock release is detected by the rack sensor 497. it can. On the back side of the game board 60a, a space is ensured on the assumption that the rotation effect unit 403b is stored at a zero angle. For example, when the rotation effect unit 403b is rotated at the retracted position PB1, the rotation effect unit 403b. In, there is a concern that the lower end portion that moves toward the side opposite to the presentation position PB2 may contact a device or the like arranged on the side opposite to the central opening 72 with the second decoration device 233 interposed therebetween. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rotation of the link parts 402 and 403 is started, the rotation effecting part 403b starts rotating at the position moved from the retracted position PB1 toward the effecting position PB2. Rotation of the rendering unit 403b avoids contact with another device or the like. As a result, damage and deformation of the rotation effect unit 403b and other devices can be suppressed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the rack 493 reaches the uppermost position HB2, the second shaft portion 405 pushed up by the rack 493 also reaches the uppermost position HB1, and the rotation effecting unit 403b rotates. While moving to the production position PB2. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is caught by the rising stopper 412 (the ceiling surface 411b of the main body elongated hole 411a) of the main body guide portion 411, whereby the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 is stopped, and accordingly, the rotation effect is produced. The movement of the portion 403b stops. When the rotation effect unit 403b is at the effect position PB2, the ceiling surface 495a of the hooking hole 495 of the rack 493 is separated upward from the second shaft unit 405.

  The link drive unit 442 stops driving as the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. When the link driving unit 442 stops driving, the urging force of the spring member 451 reduces the angle between the first link unit 402 and the main body unit 401 (the rotation effecting unit 403b moves to the retracted position PB1). There is concern that the first link portion 402 may rotate. On the other hand, as described above, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the effect position PB2, the intersection angle (link angle β) between the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 becomes smaller than 90 degrees. By the fact that the second shaft portion 405 is caught by the rising stopper 412, the rotation of the first link portion 402 is blocked against the biasing force of the spring member 451. Therefore, even when the link driving unit 442 is stopped, the rotation effect unit 403b is held at the effect position PB2.

<Storing of rotation effect unit 403b>
Next, a case where the rotation effect unit 403b returns from the effect position PB2 to the retracted position PB1 will be described.

  The second decoration device 233 shifts to the retracted state when the link drive unit 442 is driven by the reverse rotation. When the link drive unit 442 starts driving, the rack 493 moves downward from the uppermost position HB2, so that the ceiling surface 495a of the hook hole 495 of the rack 493 moves to the second axis as shown in FIG. The part 405 is hooked from above. Then, the rack 493 moves downward with the second shaft portion 405 hooked, so that the second shaft portion 405 pulled down by the rack 493 is moved to a position higher than the uppermost position HB1 as shown in FIG. 22B. It will move downward. In this case, the link parts 402 and 403 rotate in the direction in which the rotation effect part 403b moves to the retracted position PB1 against the biasing force of the spring member 451.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the rack 493 passes through the unlock position LB3 and reaches the lowest position LB2 by being lowered by the driving force of the link driver 442, the link driver 442 is Be stopped. Here, the detected portion 498 of the rack 493 is detected by the rack sensor 497, whereby it is detected that the rack 493 has reached the lowermost position LB2.

  When the rack 493 reaches the lowermost position LB2, the second shaft portion 405 also reaches the lowermost position LB1, and accordingly, the rotation effecting unit 403b also reaches the retracted position PB1. In this case, the lock mechanism of the second decoration device 233 is in a locked state by the restriction catching portion 515 of the rotation restricting member 511 being caught by the rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493. As a result, the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 is restricted against the biasing force of the spring member 451.

  When the rotation effecting unit 403b is moved to the retracted position PB1, the effect driving unit 475 causes the rotation effecting unit 403b for effecting the rotation drive in accordance with the fact that the link driving unit 442 starts the driving in the reverse rotation. The rotation effecting unit 403b is stopped and driven in a direction in which the rotation effecting unit 403b has a zero angle with respect to the link unit body 403a of the second link unit 403. In this case, in the second decoration device 233, while the link parts 402 and 403 are rotated in the direction of moving the rotation effect part 403b to the retracted position PB1, the rotation effect part 403b is rotated in the direction of the zero angle. Become. As a result, the rotation effecting unit 403b reaches the retracted position PB1 with the rotation effecting unit 403b having a zero angle with respect to the link unit body 403a.

<Electrical wiring of the second decoration device 233>
The second decoration device 233 has a plurality of light emitting units (not shown). In the second decoration device 233, the effect is enhanced by the light emitting unit emitting light in accordance with the movement of the rotation effecting unit 403b. The light emitting unit has a light emitting body such as an LED and a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of the light emitting bodies are mounted, and is provided in the second link section 403. In the second link portion 403, the front surface portion of the rotation effect portion 403b is formed as a light transmitting portion by a member having a light transmitting property, and the light emitting portion is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting portion. When the light emitting unit emits light, for example, a part imitating a bone or a character is illuminated.

  Electric wiring is connected to the light emitting unit, and power is supplied from the power supply / launch control device 191 to the light emitting substrate through the electric wiring. The electric wiring is laid inside the link portions 402 and 403 without hindering the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 and the deformation of the rotation effecting portion 403b. In the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406, wiring through holes are formed at positions overlapping the respective axes, and electrical wiring is provided from the back side of the main body portion 401 to the wiring through holes of the first shaft portion 404. It is in a state of entering the inside of the first link portion 402 through the inside and entering the inside of the second link portion 403 through the wiring through hole of the third shaft portion 406.

  In the second link unit 403, electric wiring is also connected to the production drive unit 475 and the production sensor 487. These electric wirings are laid inside the first link portion 402 through the wiring through holes of the first shaft portion 404, as well as the electric wirings for the light emitting portion, while the wiring through holes of the third shaft portion 406 are provided. Through to the front side of the link body 403a. Electric wiring is connected to the effect driving unit 475 on the front surface side of the link body 403a, and electric wiring is connected to the effect sensor 487 at a portion drawn back into the link body 403a.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 602 is mounted on the main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. The RAM 604 is an element including an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 or the function of the RAM 604 may be provided as another element.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 602, the power failure monitoring board 605 provided in the main control device 162, the payout control device 181, various detection sensors and the like are connected. In this case, the power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the MPU 602, as a part of various detection sensors, a prize detection sensor for the general winning opening 61, a prize detection sensor for the upper working opening 62, a winning detection sensor for the lower working opening 63, The winning detection sensor for the variable winning device 64 and the winning detection sensor for the through gate 65 are connected, and the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 determines the winning of each winning portion (win determination). In addition, the MPU 602 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 62 and the lower working opening 63, and also executes the support generating lottery based on the winning of the through gate 65.

  A power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, and a notification / effect control device 143 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. To the payout control device 181, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the winning determination to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to. Then, when the winning of the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is output, and when the winning of the variable winning device 64 is specified, 15 gaming balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game ball is output, and when the winning of the upper working opening 62 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three gaming balls is output, and the winning of the winning ball into the lower working opening 63 is performed. If specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a variation command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes. In particular, in the variation command as the command for game times, in addition to the information on the game result of each game time and the information on the variable display time of each game time, the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device are used as the various information. Information on whether to operate the decoration device 233 is included.

  In addition, on the output side of the MPU 602, there are a accessory driving unit for driving the electric accessory 71 attached to the lower working port 63, a variable ball driving unit for driving the opening / closing door of the variable winning device 64, and the main display unit 81. It is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning ball drive unit of the variable winning device 64 so that the big winning opening of the variable winning device 64 is opened and closed. When the lower working port 63 is in the open state (support win), the MPU 602 executes drive control of the accessory drive unit of the electric accessory 71 so that the electric accessory 71 is opened and closed. .. Further, at each game time, the display control of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

  Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal when the state is changed. When the game result is a big hit result, the MPU 602 can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the big hit signal output terminal. Specifically, in the normal time, the LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when the jackpot result is obtained, the HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays the main control board 601 and the power supply / launch control device 191, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout device 222 to pay out prize balls or loan balls based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power necessary for each of the main control board 601 and the payout control device 181 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for the launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 602 uses various counter information at the time of playing a game to perform jackpot generation lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 81, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like, and specifically, shown in FIG. As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the reach random number counter C3 used for allocating the presence / absence of the reach occurrence and the type thereof. The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 81 and the symbol display device 75 are used. Further, an electric accessory counter C4 used for a lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 71 of the lower operation opening 63 is in the electric open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired in the RAM 604 when a prize is won at the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63. It is stored in a reserved ball storage area 632 provided as information storage means.

  The holding sphere storage area 632 includes a holding area RE including a first result displaying portion holding area Ra and a second result displaying portion holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with first areas Ra1 and Rb1, second areas Ra2 and Rb2, third areas Ra3 and Rb3, and fourth areas Ra4 and Rb4, and are connected to the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 according to the winning history, are used as pending information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4. Stored in. The pending information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 to the fourth areas Ra4 and Rb4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63 occur successively a plurality of times, the first areas Ra1, Rb1 → Numerical information is sequentially stored in the order of 2 areas Ra2, Rb2 → third area Ra3, Rb3 → fourth area Ra4, Rb4. In this way, the four areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4 are respectively provided, so that the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63 is stored up to four, respectively. Is becoming In addition, a total reserve number storage area is provided in the reserve ball storage area 632, and the total reserve number storage area specifies the number for which the winning history for the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63 is held and stored. The information for doing is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 81, and starts one game time. At that time, a win / fail judgment is made on the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 62, and the second result display section of the RAM 604 is stored when the game ball wins the lower working opening 63. It is stored in the reservation area Rb.

  The value of the random number that is a big hit is stored as a win / loss table (win / win information group) in the win / win table storage area 621 as the win / win information group storage unit in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the win / loss table will be described. As the win / loss table, a win / loss table for low probability mode (low probability win / loss information group) and a win / loss table for high probability mode (high probability win / loss information group) are set. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) as the lottery modes in the win / loss lottery means.

  In the gaming state where the win / loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the value of the random number for the jackpot win (that is, the win information) is two. On the other hand, in the game state in which the winning / discarding table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number which is the jackpot winning is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation in the high probability mode.

  If the probability of winning in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and the jackpot random numbers to be jackpot in the low-probability mode. The value group of the counter C1 may or may not include a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the high probability mode.

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the value of the random number that is a big hit.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 62 or the lower working opening 63. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display reserve area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 62, and the second result display section of the RAM 604 is stored when the game ball wins the lower working opening 63. It is stored in the reservation area Rb.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, (1) a win / loss lottery mode in the win / loss lottery means after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 71 of the lower working opening 63 after the end of the open / close execution mode are referred to as 2 Different types of jackpot results are set by setting different conditions. As the winning / winning lottery mode, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are set as described above.

  As the support mode, the frequency at which the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 is in the accepting state per unit time when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted to the game area PE in the same manner. The low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high or low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of being elected as a power-accepting state win in the electric accessory lottery using the electric accessory counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 71 is in the accepting state when the winning combination is accepted is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric officer accepting state is elected and the accepting state of the electric accessory 71 occurs a plurality of times, waiting for the end of one accepting state to the start of the next accepting state. The time is set shorter than the acceptance time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric-powered accessory lottery after one electric-powered accessory lottery is performed. Has been done.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the lower working opening 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper working opening 62 is higher than that in the lower working opening 63, but in the high frequency support mode, winning in the lower working opening 63 is higher than that in the upper working opening 62. Is more likely to occur. Then, when a prize is generated in the lower working opening 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric power accepting state per unit time more than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to increase the probability of winning the electric-role acceptance state. In addition, the number of switching to the receiving state is increased, the receiving time is lengthened, and the minimum securement is ensured when the next electric accessory lottery is performed after one electric lottery drawing is performed. By shortening the time (that is, shortening the single variable display time in the accessory result display unit) and increasing the winning probability, by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the frequency support mode may be increased.

  The distribution destination of the game result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set.

  The normal jackpot result is high frequency support until the win / loss lottery mode becomes a low probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode and the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode is changed. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference number of times has elapsed, the low frequency support mode is entered.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win / loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the lottery result in the win / loss lottery becomes a big hit state win and the opening / closing execution mode is shifted accordingly.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary. Further, the jackpot result allocation destination is not limited to the above two types, and for example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball becomes high and low, and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the types of jackpot results are increased from the above two types by providing a difference in the mode of the mode transition destination.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 75. With the expected effect, in the game machine in which the variable winning device 64 is in the opening / closing execution mode in the game times, the stop result after the variable display is the added correspondence result, the variable display of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 75 is started. Is a display state for making the player think that the variation display state is likely to be the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed.

  Two types of expected display are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display or the addition correspondence result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, thereby displaying the combination of the reach symbols, and in the state, the remaining symbols are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol column is included. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and by performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

  In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, or a part of the symbol columns is plural. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol column, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol column is included. Further, it also includes a background screen having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes, and a pattern on the symbol row having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. Such advance notice display can occur in both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

  The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game game in which the opening / closing execution mode is entered. Further, in the game times that do not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. Is executed if On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main control device 162 but by the notification / effect control device 143 or the display control device 170.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used in determining the fluctuation display time in the main display unit 81 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 81 and at the time of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 75.

  The electric accessory counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric reserve area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 65. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 71 of the lower operation port 63 to the receiving state by the stored value of the electric accessory counter C4. For example, if C3 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 71 is controlled to the receiving state, and if C3 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 71 is not controlled to the receiving state.

  As described above, in the MPU 602, the variable display time in the main display unit 81 is determined using at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 603 is used in the determination. .. Further, in the MPU 602, the stop result in the main display unit 81 is determined using the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The result table storage area is used.

<Regarding the electrical configurations of the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 170>
The electrical configurations of the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 170 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 23 again.

  The notification / effect control device 143 controls the lamp parts 26 to 28 and the speaker part 29 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

  The notification / production control device 143 has an audio lamp control board 651 on which the MPU 652 is mounted, and the MPU 652 has a ROM 653 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 653 when executing the control program. A RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, is incorporated.

  The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652 and receives various commands from the main controller 162. On the output side of the MPU 652, the various lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected, and the display control device 170 is also connected.

  The display control device 170 includes a display control board 701 on which an MPU 702 is mounted, and the MPU 702 has a program ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and control stored in the program ROM. A work RAM, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a program, is incorporated.

  To the display control board 701, the symbol display device 75, the drive units 281 and 281 of the first decoration device 232, and the drive units 442 and 475 of the second decoration device 233 are connected. The MPU 702 of the display control device 170 performs display control of the symbol display device 75 and drive control of the drive units 281, 284, 442, 475 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 143. In this case, the MPU 702 outputs a command signal to the drive units 281, 182, 442, 475. In the display control device 170, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the variable display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed are determined, and reach is generated. Whether or not and the contents of reach production are determined.

  Further, in the MPU 702, based on the variation command input from the main control device 162, the timing at which the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 execute the special effect at each game time is determined. Specifically, by referring to the value of each special effect timing determination counter stored in the work RAM of the MPU 702, it is determined whether or not it is the time to start any special effect.

  The special effects include a first special effect that operates the first decoration device 232 and a second special effect that operates the second decoration device 233. In the first special effect, the moving effect part 243b of the first decoration device 232 is moved from the retracted position PA1 to the effect position PA2 so that the moving effect part 243b simulating a dog's face appears in front of the display screen 75a. Is. In the second special effect, the rotation effecting unit 403b of the second decoration device 233 is moved from the retracted position PB1 to the effecting position PB2 so that the rotation effecting unit 403b imitating a bone appears while rotating in front of the display screen 75a. It is a thing.

  The execution timing of the first special effect and the second special effect is random during one game. For example, at any timing from the start of the variable display of each symbol on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 to the end of the variable display, or the reach display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It is performed during the period from when the reach display is finished to when the reach display is finished.

  The first special effect and the second special effect may be individually executed or may be executed at overlapping timings. Depending on which of these special effects is executed, the degree of expectation of one of the jackpot results in each game time is different. For example, the degree of expectation is set to be high in the order of the second special effect → the first special effect → the first special effect and the second special effect. In this case, the degree of expectation is lowest when the second special effect is performed, and highest when both the first special effect and the second special effect are performed.

  Further, the display control device 170 is connected to the arm sensor 325 and the rack sensor 337 of the first decoration device 232, and the effect sensor 487 and the rack sensor 497 of the second decoration device 233. These sensors 325, 337, and 487 and 497 output detection signals to the MPU 702. The MPU 702 determines the state of the first decoration device 232 and sets command signals to the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 based on the detection signals of the arm sensor 325 and the rack sensor 337. Further, based on the detection signals of the effect sensor 487 and the rack sensor 497, the state of the second decoration device 233 is determined, and the command signals to the link drive unit 442 and the effect drive unit 475 are set.

<Special effect processing>
The MPU 702 of the display control device 170 causes the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 to perform the first special effect and the second special effect by executing the special effect process. Here, the effect process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an effect process executed by the display control device 170, and FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an operation process of the second decoration device 233. The MPU 702 repeatedly executes the special effect process at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  In FIG. 25, in step S101, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special effect by the first decoration device 232. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the first special effect. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, and when the retracted state is determined, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special effect. Incidentally, the determination as to whether or not the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state includes the determination as to whether or not the intermediate arm 261 is in the retracted state, and this determination is based on the detection signal of the arm sensor 325. To do.

  When executing the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S102, and the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are each driven to start driving in the normal rotation. Here, by outputting a command signal to both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282, the drive of these drive units 281 and 282 is started at the same time. As a result, in the first decoration device 232, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in the direction in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2. In this case, the intermediate arm 261 extends from the contracted state to the extended state.

  In S103, it is determined whether the intermediate arm 261 has transitioned to the bent state. Here, it is determined whether the rotation angle of the first drive unit 281 has reached the bending angle, and when the bending angle has been reached, the intermediate arm 261 transitions to the bending state. A sensor for detecting the angle of the first arm portion 264 with respect to the second arm portion 265, the angle of the second arm portion 265 with respect to the main body portion 241, and the angle of the first arm portion 264 with respect to the first link portion 242 are provided. Then, based on the detection signal of this sensor, it may be determined whether or not the intermediate arm 261 has transitioned to the bent state. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether or not the angle of the first arm portion 264 with respect to the second arm portion 265 is smaller than a predetermined angle, and when it is smaller, the intermediate arm 261 is bent. It is determined that the transition has been made.

  When the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the bent state, the process proceeds to step S104, and the driving of the first drive unit 281 is stopped. Accordingly, for example, it is possible to achieve energy saving as compared with a configuration in which both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are continuously driven until the movement rendering unit 243b reaches the rendering position PA2. Here, the position of the movement rendering unit 243b when the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the bent state corresponds to the drive stop position.

  It should be noted that the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the stretched state even after the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped, while being pulled by the first link unit 242 that is rotated by the driving force of the second driving unit 282. In this case, the first drive unit 281 also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the first arm unit 264 of the intermediate arm 261, so that the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2, whereby the rotation angle of the first driving unit 281. Will reach the production angle. If the intermediate arm 261 has not transitioned to the bent state, the special effect process is repeatedly executed until the transition.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the movement effect unit 243b has reached the effect position PA2. Here, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle of the second drive unit 282 has reached the effect angle, and when it has reached the effect angle, the movement effect unit 243b has reached the effect position PA2. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 and the rack 333 are in the state of being moved to the uppermost positions HA1 and HA2, respectively. If a sensor that detects the angle of the first link portion 242 with respect to the main body portion 241 and that the second shaft portion 245 has moved to the uppermost position HA1 is provided, the movement effect is based on the detection signal of this sensor. You may determine whether the part 243b moved to the production position PA2. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether or not the second shaft portion 245 has moved to the uppermost position HA1, and when it has moved, it is determined that the movement rendering unit 243b has reached the rendering position PA2.

  When the movement effect unit 243b reaches the effect position PA2, the process proceeds to step S106, and the driving of the second drive unit 282 is stopped. In this case, the first decoration device 232 is in the effect state and is performing the first special effect. In addition, when the movement effect part 243b has not reached the effect position PA2, this special effect process is repeatedly executed until it reaches.

  Then, in step S107, it is determined whether or not to end the first special effect. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the first special effect. In addition, it is determined in advance whether the first decoration device 232 is in the effect state, and when the effect is in the effect state, it is determined whether to end the first special effect.

  When ending the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S108, and the second drive unit 282 is driven in reverse rotation. In this case, in the first decoration device 232, the rack 333 moves downward from the uppermost position HA2, and accordingly, the second shaft portion 245 also moves downward from the uppermost position HA1. As a result, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in the direction in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1.

  In step S109, based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 337, it is determined whether the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2. Note that it may be determined whether or not the rack 333 has reached the lowest position, based on the rotation angle (driving angle) of the rotation shaft portion of the second driving unit 282. For example, the second drive unit 282 is set with the angle of the rotary shaft portion of the second drive unit 282 in the state before the movement production unit 243b is moved to the production position PA2 (the state in which the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2) as a reference angle. It is determined whether or not the drive angle of 1 has returned to the reference angle, and when it returns, it is determined that the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2.

  When the rack 333 reaches the lowermost position LA2, the driving of the second driving unit 282 is stopped in step S110, and the first driving unit 281 is driven in step S111. In this case, since the intermediate arm 261 contracts in accordance with the driving of the first driving unit 281, even if the driving of the second driving unit 282 is stopped, the link effect 402 in the direction in which the movement effecting unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1. , 403 is continuously rotated. If the rack 333 has not reached the lowest position LA2, this special effect process is repeatedly executed until it reaches the lowest position LA2.

  In step S112, it is determined whether or not the movement rendering unit 243b has reached the retracted position PA1. Here, as described above, based on the detection signal of the arm sensor 325, it is determined whether or not the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, and when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the movement rendering unit 243b is It is determined that the retracted position PA1 has been reached. Note that it may be determined based on the drive angle of the first drive unit 281 whether or not the movement effecting unit 243b has reached the retracted position PA1. For example, with the angle of the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281 in the state before the movement rendering unit 243b is moved to the rendering position PA2 (the state where the second shaft portion 245 is at the lowest position LA1) as a reference angle, the first It is determined whether or not the drive angle of the drive unit 281 has returned to the reference angle, and when it has returned, it is determined that the movement effecting unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1.

  If the movement effecting unit 243b has moved to the retracted position PA1, the process proceeds to step S113, and the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped. In this case, the first decoration device 232 has moved to the retracted state, and the first special effect has ended. In addition, when the moving effect part 243b has not reached the evacuation position PA1, this special effect process is repeatedly executed until it reaches.

  In step S114, the operation process of the second decoration device 233 is executed. The operation process of the second decoration device 233 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 26, in step S201, it is determined whether or not to execute the second special effect by the second decoration device 233. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the second special effect. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, and when the retracted state is performed, it is determined whether or not to execute the second special effect. Incidentally, the determination as to whether or not the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state includes determination as to whether or not the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 and the rotation effect unit 403b is at the zero angle. Whether the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2 is determined based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 497, and whether the rotation effect unit 403b is at the zero angle is determined based on the detection signal of the effect sensor 487. Based on.

  When performing the second special effect, the process proceeds to step S202, and the link drive unit 442 is driven in the normal rotation. As a result, in the second decoration device 233, the rack 493 moves upward from the lowest position LB2.

  In step S203, it is determined whether or not the rotation restriction of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 by the lock mechanism has been released. Here, based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 497, it is determined whether the rack 493 has passed through the lock release position LB3 and moved upward, and when the rack 493 has passed through the lock release position LB3, rotation regulation is performed. Is determined to have been canceled. Note that it may be determined based on the drive angle of the link drive unit 442 whether or not the rotation restriction by the lock mechanism has been released. For example, when the rotation effect unit 403b is moved from the effect position PB2 to the retracted position PB1, the angle of the rotation shaft portion of the link drive unit 442 is used as a reference angle, and when the drive angle with respect to the reference angle reaches a predetermined angle, If the rack 333 reaches the lock release position LB3, it is determined that the rotation restriction by the lock mechanism has been released.

  If the rotation restriction is released, the process proceeds to step S204, and the effect drive unit 475 is started to rotate in the forward direction. In this case, the rotational force of the effect drive unit 475 is applied to the link units 402 and 403 in addition to the drive force of the link drive unit 442, so that the rotation of these link units 402 and 403 is accelerated. If the rotation restriction is not released, this operation process is repeatedly executed until it is released.

  In step S205, it is determined whether the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the effect position PB2. Here, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle of the link drive unit 442 has reached the effect angle, and when it has reached the effect angle, the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the effect position PB2. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 and the rack 493 are in the state of being moved to the uppermost positions HB1 and HB2, respectively. If a sensor that detects the angle of the first link portion 402 with respect to the main body portion 401 and that the second shaft portion 405 has moved to the uppermost position HB1 is provided, the rotation effect is generated based on the detection signal of this sensor. You may determine whether the part 403b moved to the production position PB2. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether or not the second shaft portion 405 has moved to the uppermost position HB1, and when it has moved, it is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the effect position PB2.

  When the rotation effect unit 403b reaches the effect position PB2, the process proceeds to step S206, and the driving of the link drive unit 442 is stopped. In this case, the second decoration device 233 is in the effect state and is executing the second special effect. After the rotation effect unit 403b has moved to the effect position PB2, the effect drive unit 475 is driven so as to rotate the rotation effect unit 403b in a manner that enhances the effect. As a mode for enhancing the effect, for example, the normal rotation and the reverse rotation are alternately performed, and the driving speed is irregularly changed. If the rotation effect unit 403b has not reached the effect position PB2, this operation process is repeatedly executed until the effect position PB2 is reached.

  Then, in step S207, it is determined whether or not to end the second special effect. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the second special effect. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not the second decoration device 233 is in the effect state, and when the effect is in the effect state, it is determined whether or not to end the second special effect.

  When ending the second special effect, the process proceeds to step S208, the link drive unit 442 is driven in the reverse rotation, and the effect drive unit 475 is driven so that the rotation effect unit 403b has a zero angle. In this case, in the second decoration device 233, the rack 493 moves downward from the uppermost position HB2, and accordingly, the second shaft portion 405 also moves downward from the uppermost position HB1. As a result, the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 rotate in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the retracted position PB1. Regarding the effect drive unit 475, it is determined whether the normal rotation or the reverse rotation requires a small rotation angle to shift the rotation effect unit 403b to the zero angle, and the effect is generated in the direction in which the required rotation angle is smaller. The drive unit 475 is rotated.

  In step S209, based on the detection signal of the effect sensor 487, it is determined whether or not the rotation effect unit 403b has shifted to the zero angle. In addition, based on the rotation angle of the performance drive unit 475, it may be determined whether the rotation performance unit 403b is at the zero angle. For example, with the rotation effecting unit 403b in the retracted position PB1 and before starting rotation (before driving the effecting driving unit 475), the angle of the rotary shaft of the effecting driving unit 475 is used as a reference angle, and the effecting driving unit is used. It is determined whether the drive angle of 475 has returned to the reference angle, and when it has returned, it is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has shifted to the zero angle.

  When the rotation effect unit 403b shifts to the zero angle, the process proceeds to step S210, and the driving of the effect drive unit 475 is stopped. If the rotation effect unit 403b has not moved to the zero angle, this operation process is repeatedly executed until the rotation angle is reached.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the retracted position PB1. Here, as described above, based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 497, it is determined whether or not the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2, and after the rotation effect unit 403b starts moving from the effect position PB2. It is determined whether or not the rotation angle of the link drive unit 442 has reached the effect angle. Then, when the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 and the rotation angle of the link drive unit 442 reaches the effect angle, it is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the retracted position PB1. Accordingly, if the rack 493 is located at a position lower than the unlock position LB3, the rack 493 has moved to the lowest position LB2 even if the detected portion 498 of the rack 493 is detected by the rack sensor 497. The accuracy of the judgment about the thing can be improved.

  If a sensor that individually detects that the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 and that it is at the unlock position LB3 is provided, the rotation effecting unit 403b retracts based on the detection signal of this sensor. It may be possible to determine whether or not the position PB1 has been reached. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether the rack 493 has moved to the lowermost position LB2, and when the rack 493 has moved to the lowermost position LB2, a determination regarding the rotation angle of the link drive unit 442. It is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the retracted position PB1 without performing the above.

  When the rotation effect unit 403b has moved to the retracted position PB1, the process proceeds to step S212, and the drive of the link drive unit 442 is stopped. In this case, the second decoration device 233 is moved to the retracted state, and the second special effect is ended. If the rotation effect unit 403b has not reached the retracted position PB1, this operation process is repeatedly executed until it reaches the retracted position PB1.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

<Regarding the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 of the first decoration device 232>
Since the first decoration device 232 has the link mechanism including the main body section 241 and the link sections 242 and 243, the movement range of the movement rendering section 243b is expanded and the operation modes of the movement rendering section 243b are diversified. It will be possible. Therefore, by moving the movement effect part 243b to the effect position PA2, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement effect part 243b.

  Since the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are individually provided for the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are individually provided according to the operation modes of the link units 242 and 243. The selected motor or the like can be set as the drive units 281 and 282, respectively. For this reason, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as large as the first drive unit 281 and a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the second drive unit 282. Thus, even if a motor or the like that is not a dedicated product but a general-purpose product is selected as the drive units 281 and 282 for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, in order to operate the link mechanism with respect to the driving force applied to the link mechanism. It is possible to secure the required torque and also secure the maximum speed necessary for moving the movement effecting unit 243b to the effect position PA2 quickly. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the effect of the first decoration device 232.

  Regarding the rated torque, the first drive unit 281 is made larger than the second drive unit 282, and the rated speed is made larger in the second drive unit 282 than the first drive unit 281. Regarding the rotation of the parts 242 and 243, the driving force of the first driving part 281 can accelerate the acceleration quickly, and the second driving part 282 can increase the maximum speed. In this case, since the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 only have to play different roles, a general-purpose motor or the like can be selected as the drive units 281 and 282.

  When the first special effect is executed, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are driven, so that the first drive unit 281 operates the second drive unit 282 for a period in which the drive speed is higher. It can be used as a period for acceleration. Therefore, the rotation speed of the link portions 242 and 243 can be increased by selectively utilizing the drive force of the drive portion 281 or 182 having the higher drive speed each time.

  In the execution of the first special effect, the rack 333 that moves with the driving of the second driving unit 282 catches up with the second shaft 245 that moves with the driving of the first driving unit 281, and then the first driving unit. Since the drive of 281 is stopped, it is possible to prevent the first drive unit 281 from acting as a power-generating brake.

  Since the effect angle of the rotary shaft portion of the second drive unit 282 is larger than the effect angle of the rotary shaft portion of the first drive unit 281, the rotation required for the drive speed of the second drive unit 282 to reach the rated speed is ensured. It becomes easier to secure. In this case, since the maximum value of the performance of the second drive unit 282 is exerted when the movement rendering unit 243b is moved to the rendering position PA2, the rotation speed of the link units 242 and 243 can be increased.

  At the end of the first special effect, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is started and stopped after the driving of the second driving unit 282 is started and stopped, so that the peak value of power consumption can be suppressed. This is effective for maintenance of electric power equipment in a game hall or the like where a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  Since the rack 333 is formed with the hooking hole 335, the second shaft portion 245 is relatively movable with respect to the rack 333. Therefore, the first drive portion 281 and the second drive portion 282 drive the second shaft portion 245. The difference in speed can be allowed between the second shaft portion 245 and the rack 333. Therefore, unlike the configuration in which the second shaft portion 245 cannot move relative to the rack 333, when the first special effect is started, the moving speed of the rack 333 accompanying the drive of the first drive portion 281 is the second speed. It is possible to avoid slowing down in accordance with the moving speed of the second shaft portion 245 due to the driving of the driving portion 282. Therefore, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the movement rendering unit 243b immediately after the link units 242 and 243 start rotating in the rendering direction.

  Since the moving direction of the second shaft portion 245 with respect to the rack 333 coincides with the moving direction of the rack 333 with respect to the main body portion 241, the rack 333 pushes the second shaft portion 245, or the second shaft portion 245 causes the rack 333 to move. Loss of force is less likely to occur when pressing. In this case, since the driving force of the drive units 281 and 280 is efficiently transmitted to the link units 242 and 243, the rotation speed of the link units 242 and 243 can be increased.

  Since the rotational movement of the second drive unit 282 is converted into the linear movement of the rack 333 by the pinion gear 332 and the rack 333, loss when the drive force of the second drive unit 282 is transmitted to the rack 333 is unlikely to occur. ..

  Since the urging force of the spring member 291 is applied to the link portions 242 and 243 in a direction suitable for the effect, the rotational speed of the link portions 242 and 243 can be increased. In addition, the urging force of the spring member 291 is larger when the movement rendering unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1 than when it is at the rendering position PA2 because the elongation rate of the spring member 291 is larger. Is becoming On the other hand, when ending the first special effect, after starting and stopping the second drive unit 282 having a smaller rated torque, the first drive unit 281 having a larger rated torque is started and driven. By stopping, the peak value of the power consumption can be suppressed, and the rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 in the retracted direction can be suppressed from being excessively delayed by the biasing force of the spring member 291.

  Since both the drive units 281 and 280 are mounted on the main body 241, the weight of the link units 242 and 243 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the drive units 281 and 280 are mounted on the link units 242 and 243. You can In this case, a motor or the like having a rated torque as small as possible can be selected as the drive units 281 and 282, so that the rotational speeds of the link units 242 and 243 can be improved.

  Since the first shaft portion 244 is arranged on the extension line of the main body guide portion 251, even if the second shaft portion 245 moves to the dead center, the rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 depends on the driving direction of the first driving portion 281. The moving direction can be properly selected. Therefore, by including the dead center in the moving range of the second shaft portion 245, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the moving range of the movement rendering unit 243b is as large as possible, and even with this configuration, the link unit 242 is also provided. , 243 can be rotated in an appropriate direction.

<Regarding the intermediate arm 261 of the first decoration device 232>
Since the driving force of the first driving portion 281 is applied to the intermediate position of the first link portion 242 via the intermediate arm 261, the link side shaft portion 263 of the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first shaft portion 244 of the first link portion 242. The moment of the force for rotating the first link portion 242 can be increased by the amount separated from. For this reason, even if a motor having a slightly smaller rated torque is selected as the first drive unit 281, a moment of force for rotating the link units 242, 243 should be secured. Will be possible. As a result, a motor or the like whose rated speed is as high as possible can be selected as the first drive unit 281. In this case, it is possible to increase the rotation speed of the link portions 242 and 243 in the presentation direction, and as a result, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the presentation of the first decoration device 232.

  Since the link portions 242 and 243 rotate in the direction of performance or the retreat direction as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, even if the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the intermediate position of the first link portion 242, the intermediate arm 261 moves to the first position. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the rotation range of the 1-link portion 242 is not limited.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts with the intermediate shaft portion 266 bent, the structure in which the rotational movement of the first drive portion 281 is converted into the expansion and contraction movement of the intermediate arm 261 can be easily realized. Further, when the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 rotate together with the first link portion 242, so that the rotation of the second arm portion 265 causes the rotation of the first link portion 242. It is possible to realize a configuration that does not hinder the dynamic movement.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 in the direction of the production is restricted. Therefore, the intermediate arm 261 can be moved without using a dedicated member that operates independently of the link portions 242 and 243. It is possible to prevent the rendering unit 243b from unintentionally appearing in front of the display screen 75a. In this case, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the first decoration device 232 from becoming complicated in order to realize the configuration in which the movement rendering unit 243b can be moved appropriately.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 is in a state of extending from the first link portion 242 toward the side opposite to the effect position PA2 when in the contracted state, the intermediate arm 261 is in the case where the movement effect part 243b is in the retracted position PA1. It can be avoided that 261 is exposed in front of the display screen 75a. Moreover, in this case, the configuration in which the intermediate arm 261 is arranged on the opposite side of the performance position PA2 with the first link portion 242 sandwiched can be realized regardless of the rotating state of the link portions 242, 243. The 1-link portion 242 and the intermediate arm 261 can be arranged along the width direction of the main body portion 241. Thus, for example, the thickness dimension of the first decoration device 232 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the intermediate arm 261 is arranged between the main body portion 241 and the first link portion 242. Reducing the thickness of the first decoration device 232 is effective in installing the first decoration device 232 in a limited area on the back side of the game board 60a (between the game board 60a and the unit body 231). Is.

  When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the reverse rotation of the second arm portion 265 is restricted by the reverse rotation stopper 269. Therefore, the intermediate arm 261 is driven in the same driving direction. It can be avoided that both stretching and contracting of 261 are performed. Therefore, by selecting the driving direction of the first driving unit 281, it is possible to properly manage the extension and contraction of the intermediate arm 261.

  In the intermediate arm 261, the driving force of the first drive unit 281 is applied to the second arm unit 265, so that the first drive unit 281 and the first transmission unit 301 are mounted on the intermediate arm 261 and the first link unit 242. No need. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the first link portion 242 and the intermediate arm 261, and as a result, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the link portions 242 and 243 in the performance direction.

  When the movement effect part 243b is in the effect position PA2, the link angle α1 of the second link part 243 with respect to the first link part 242 is less than or equal to a predetermined angle (for example, 90 degrees), so that the intermediate arm 261 contracts. Therefore, the rotation of the first link portion 242 in the retracted direction is restricted. For this reason, even if the drive of the drive units 281 and 280 is stopped after the movement rendering unit 243b has moved to the rendering position PA2, it is possible to prevent the link units 242 and 243 from unintentionally rotating in the retracted direction. .. That is, it is possible to prevent the movement rendering unit 243b from unintentionally moving toward the retracted position PA1.

  Even if the link angle α1 is equal to or smaller than the predetermined angle, the second shaft portion 245 moves in the direction (downward) for rotating the second link portion 243 in the retracted direction, whereby the first arm 261 is contracted. The rotation restriction of the link portion 242 can be released. Therefore, even if a dedicated member that operates independently of the link portions 242 and 243 is not provided, the link portion 242 in the retracted direction can be utilized by utilizing a part of the operation of the link mechanism, which is the movement of the second shaft portion 245. , 243 can be restarted.

  When the link angle α1 becomes larger than the predetermined angle due to the end of the first special effect, the intermediate arms 261 contract as the driving of the first drive unit 281 starts, so that the link units 242 and 243 are in the retracted direction. Since it rotates, the driving force of the first drive unit 281 can be used for both the turning direction of the link portions 242 and 243 and the turning direction. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated drive unit for rotating the link portions 242 and 243 in the retracted direction, and thus the cost burden can be reduced.

  When the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, the first arm portion 264 rotates about the intermediate shaft portion 266 with respect to the second arm portion 265, and when the first arm portion 264 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 form the second arm. Since there are both cases of sliding movement along the longitudinal direction of the part 265, when the link parts 242, 243 rotate in the retracted direction, the arm parts 264, 265 do not necessarily have to rotate. That is, when the intermediate arm 261 contracts from the extended state, the first transmission section 301 does not necessarily have to operate. Therefore, when the link portions 242 and 243 rotate in the retracted direction by the driving force of the second drive portion 282, it is not necessary to consume the power for operating the first transmission portion 301.

  When the first special effect is ended, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is started and stopped after the driving of the second driving unit 282 is started and stopped. Therefore, at the timing when both the driving units 281 and 282 overlap. It is possible to suppress the peak value of power consumption as compared with the driving configuration.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 is arranged at a position hidden behind the projecting portion 271 of the second link portion 243, it is possible to realize a state in which the intermediate arm 261 is difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Further, since the intermediate arm 261 is laterally arranged on the first link portion 242 in the width direction of the main body portion 241, for example, as compared with the configuration in which the intermediate arm 261 is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear sides of the first link portion 242. The thickness dimension of the first decoration device 232 can be reduced.

<Regarding the rotation effect unit 403b and the effect drive unit 475 of the second decoration device 233>
In the second link unit 403, by operating both the link unit main body 403a and the rotation effect unit 403b, the movement range of the rotation effect unit 403b is expanded and the operation mode of the rotation effect unit 403b is diversified. Will be possible. Therefore, by moving the rotation effect unit 403b to the effect position PB2, the degree of attention to the rotation effect unit 403b can be increased.

  Since the driving force is individually applied from the link driving unit 442 and the rendering driving unit 475 to each of the link unit main body 403a and the rotation rendering unit 403b, the link unit main body 403a and the rotation rendering unit 403b can be operated in respective operating modes. A motor or the like selected individually can be set as the drive units 442 and 475. Therefore, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as the link drive unit 442 and a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the rotation rendering unit 403b. In this case, even if a general-purpose motor or the like is selected as the link drive unit 442 or the performance drive unit 475 for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, the force necessary to rotate the link unit main body 403a is reduced. While securing the moment, it is possible to secure the rotation speed necessary for enhancing the effect of rotation by the rotation effect unit 403b.

  Moreover, when the link part body 403a rotates in the direction of effect, the rotation effect part 403b rotates in accordance with the effect direction, so the rotational force of the rotation effect part 403b is used to speed up the rotation of the link part body 403a. can do. In this case, by improving the rotation speed of the rotation effect unit 403b, it is possible to enhance the effect of the rotation effect unit 403b. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the effect of the second decoration device 233.

  When the rotation effect part 403b is formed in a long shape and the link parts 402 and 403 rotate in the effect direction, the upper end part of the rotation effect part 403b starts rotating from a position higher than the upper end part of the link part body 403a. The moment of the force at which the upper end of the rotation effect part 403b moves can be used for accelerating the upper end of the link body 403a.

  Moreover, since the effect shaft portion 407 is arranged at the central portion in the longitudinal direction of the rotation effect part 403b, the center of gravity of the rotation effect part 403b is not displaced even if the rotation effect part 403b rotates. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the rotational force applied from the rotation production unit 403b to the link body 403a increases or decreases due to the movement of the center of gravity of the rotation production unit 403b. As a result, the link body 403a can be rotated in a stable state in the direction of presentation.

  When the second special effect is executed, after the rotation of the link body 403a is started, the rotation of the rotation effecting unit 403b is started, so that another device or the like arranged on the back side of the game board 60a. It is possible to avoid the rotation effecting unit 403b coming into contact with.

  Since the second shaft portion 405 slides linearly due to the driving force of the link driving portion 442, the driving amount of the link driving portion 442 required to move the rotation rendering portion 403b from the retracted position PB1 to the rendering position PB2 is For example, the driving force of the link driving portion 442 is larger than that of the configuration in which the first shaft portion 404 rotates. Here, in order to increase the rotation speed of the link units 402 and 403, it is preferable to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the link drive unit 442 until the link drive unit 442 reaches the rated speed. The required driving amount can be secured. Moreover, at the time of starting the rotation of the link portions 402, 403, the rotation of the link portions 402, 403 is accelerated by the rotation force of the rotation effecting portion 403b in addition to the driving force of the link driving portion 442, so the link portions 402, 403 Even if the rated torque of the link drive unit 442 is insufficient for accelerating the 403, the insufficient amount can be compensated by the rotational force of the rotation effecting unit 403b.

  Since the second decoration device 233 has a link mechanism including the main body 401 and the link portions 402 and 403, the movement range of the rotation rendering unit 403b is expanded and the operation mode of the rotation rendering unit 403b is diversified. It will be possible. In addition, when the rotation effecting unit 403b is in the retracted position PB1, the reverse rotation stopper 469 and the upper cover body 465 restrict the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 in the retracted direction, so that the rear surface of the game board 60a is controlled. On the side, it is possible to prevent the rotation effecting unit 403b, the first link unit 402, and the like from coming into contact with other devices.

  In the longitudinal direction of the link body 403a, since the effect shaft portion 407 and the effect drive portion 475 are arranged at positions that do not overlap each other, for example, the effect shaft portion 407 and the effect drive portion 475 are arranged at positions where their axes coincide with each other. The thickness dimension of the second link portion 403 can be reduced as compared with the configuration described above.

  Furthermore, since the performance drive unit 475 is arranged at a position not included in the rotation range of the rotation performance unit 403b, the performance drive unit 475 and the rotation performance unit 403b can be arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the link unit body 403a. .. In this case, since it is not necessary to separate the rotation effect part 403b from the link part body 403a by the amount of avoiding the contact with the effect drive part 475, the thickness dimension of the second link part 403 can be minimized.

<Regarding the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack receiving portion 521 of the second decoration device 233>
Since the regulation catching portion 515 of the rotation regulating member 511 is caught by the rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493, the link portions 402 and 403 are regulated from rotating in the rendering direction, and thus are independent of the link portions 402 and 403. It is possible to prevent the rotation effecting unit 403b from unintentionally appearing in front of the display screen 75a without installing a dedicated member that operates in the second decoration device 233. In this case, since it is possible to limit the movement of the rotation effect unit 403b to the effect position PB2, it is possible to increase the expectation of the game for the rotation effect unit 403b to move to the effect position PB2.

  The movement locus of the restriction hooking portion 515 extends in a curved shape due to the rotation of the rotation restriction member 511. On the other hand, since the movement locus of the rack receiving portion 521 becomes linear along the movement direction of the rack 493, the direction in which this movement locus extends is unified to the predetermined direction (vertical direction). Therefore, in order to intersect the movement locus of the rack receiving portion 521 with the movement locus of the regulation hooking portion 515 of the rotation regulating member 511, the movement locus of the regulation hooking portion 515 with respect to the linear movement locus of the rack receiving portion 521. The positions of the rack receiving portion 521 and the regulation catching portion 515 are different from those of the configuration in which both the movement loci of the regulation catching portion 515 and the rack receiving portion 521 are curved, for example. Matching becomes easy. This can prevent the work of setting the relative operation mode between the rack 493 and the rotation restricting member 511 from becoming complicated.

  Since the rotation restricting member 511 is connected to the first link portion 402 via the connecting member 512, even if the rotation restricting member 511 is arranged at a position separated from the first link portion 402, the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the 511 rotates in conjunction with the first link portion 402. Further, since the degree of freedom regarding the installation position of the rotation restricting member 511 is increased by the connecting member 512, the rotation restricting member 511 can be arranged at the position where the restricting catching portion 515 is caught by the rack receiving portion 521.

  Since the regulation shaft portion 513 and the regulation connection portion 516 of the rotation regulation member 511 are arranged along the direction in which the first shaft portion 404 and the bulging connection portion 517 of the first link portion 402 are arranged, Since the displacement amount of the bulging connection portion 517 due to the rotation of the link portion 402 can be applied to the regulation connection portion 516 as it is, the displacement amount necessary for hooking and releasing the regulation hooking portion 515 to the rack receiving portion 521 can be provided. Therefore, the rotation restricting member 511 can be properly secured. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the configuration in which the rotation restricting member 511 rotates due to the rotation of the first link portion 402 from becoming complicated.

  Since the rack receiving portion 521 is provided on the rack 493 for converting the rotational movement of the link driving portion 442 into the linear movement, it is dedicated to operate independently of the link mechanism to move the rack receiving portion 521 in the linear movement. There is no need to provide a member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the structure of the lock mechanism that restricts the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 from becoming complicated.

  When the rack 493 moves for the execution of the second special effect, the operation of releasing the catch between the regulation hook portion 515 and the rack receiving portion 521 and the operation of the rack 493 moving the second shaft portion 405 are performed. Since the operations are sequentially executed at non-overlapping timings, it is possible to reduce the peak value of the drive torque required to perform each operation, as compared with the configuration in which these operations are performed simultaneously. Therefore, as the link drive unit 442 that drives the rack 493 to move, it is possible to select a motor or the like that has a smaller rated torque by the reduced peak value and a higher rated speed by that amount. As a result, it is possible to increase the rotational speed of the link units 402 and 403 in the direction of the performance, which is accompanied by the driving of the link drive unit 442.

  Since the moving direction of the second shaft portion 405 with respect to the rack 493 coincides with the moving direction of the rack 493 with respect to the body portion 401, when the rack 493 pushes the second shaft portion 405, or when the second shaft portion 405 causes the rack 493 to move. Loss of force is less likely to occur when pressing. In this case, the driving force of the link driving unit 442 is efficiently transmitted to the link units 402 and 403 and the rotation restricting member 511, so that the rotation speed of the link units 402 and 403 is increased, and the restriction hooking unit 515 and the rack receiving unit 515. It is possible to properly engage and release the portion 521.

  Since the rotation restricting member 511 is arranged on the opposite side of the link parts 402 and 403 with the rack 493 interposed therebetween, it is possible to prevent the rotation restricting member 511 from interfering with the rotation of the link parts 402 and 403.

  When the rotation effecting unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the regulation hooking unit 515 and the rack receiving unit 521 are hooked, so that the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 is restricted against the biasing force of the spring member 451. Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation effect unit 403b appears unintentionally in front of the display screen 75a even if the appearance speed of the rotation effect unit 403b is increased by the biasing force of the spring member 451. Can be suppressed.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

  (A1) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the second shaft portion 245 is slidable along the main body portion 241, but the second shaft portion 245 is arranged along the second link portion 243. It may be slidable. Even in this case, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in the direction in which the third shaft portion 246 approaches the second shaft portion 245, so that the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the retracted position. .. Further, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in a direction in which the third shaft portion 246 moves away from the second shaft portion 245, so that the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the rendering position. The second shaft portion 245 may be slidable with respect to both the main body portion 241 and the second link portion 243.

  Further, the third shaft portion 246 may be a slide shaft portion that is slidable along at least one of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243. Even in this case, the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 rotate in the direction in which the third shaft part 246 approaches at least one of the first shaft part 244 and the second shaft part 245, so that the movement rendering part. 243b moves toward the retracted position. In addition, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in a direction in which the third shaft portion 246 moves away from at least one of the first shaft portion 244 and the second shaft portion 245, so that the movement rendering unit 243b becomes. Move to the production position.

  (A2) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the movement rendering unit 243b is included in the second link unit 243, but the movement rendering unit 243b may be included in the first link unit 242. .. Even in this case, the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the rendering position as the link portions 242 and 243 rotate in the direction in which the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244, and the second shaft portion 245 moves. When the link portions 242 and 243 rotate in a direction away from the first shaft portion 244, the link portions 242 and 243 move toward the retracted position.

  (A3) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the rendering position PA2 when the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244. The movement rendering unit 243b may be configured to move toward the retracted position PA1 as the shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244. For example, when the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244, the third shaft portion 246 moves toward the opposite side to the effect position PA2 (the opposite side to the second decoration device 233). To do. In this configuration, in the second link portion 243, the movement rendering portion 243b extends from the link portion main body 243a toward the rendering position PA2, and in the movement rendering portion 243b, protrudes toward the rendering position PA2 side from the third shaft portion 246. The portion will appear in front of the display screen 75a.

  (A4) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the first shaft portion 244 is arranged on the extension line of the main body guide portion 251, but the first shaft portion 244 is arranged on the extension line of the main body guide portion 251. It may not be arranged. For example, the first shaft portion 244 is arranged on the effect position PA2 side with respect to the extension line of the main body guide portion 251.

  (A5) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 are arranged on the front surface side of the main body portion 241, but these link portions 242 and 243 are the main body portion 241. It may be arranged on the back side of. Even in this case, if the main body 241 is arranged at a hidden position on the back side of the game board 60a, it is possible to avoid the main body 241 being exposed to the front of the game machine.

  (A6) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the relative movement of the second shaft portion 245 with respect to the rack 333 is possible, but the second shaft portion 245 moves relative to the rack 333. It may be connected to the rack 333 in the state in which it is not performed.

  (A7) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the rotational movement of the first drive unit 281 is converted into the linear movement of the second shaft portion 245 by the rack 333 and the pinion gear 332. It is sufficient that the rotary motion is converted into the linear motion. An example of the motion converting means is a structure in which the winding unit winds a linear member such as a wire. For example, a linear member is connected to the second shaft portion 245, and the winding portion rotates with the rotation of the first driving portion 281, so that the rotational movement of the first driving portion 281 is linearly moved by the second shaft portion 245. Converted into movement.

  (A8) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the spring member 291 is provided in a state of being stretched over the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241, but the spring member 291 is provided in the second link. It may be provided in a state of being stretched over the portion 243 and the main body portion 241, or may be provided in a state of being stretched over the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243. In short, it suffices that the spring member 291 is provided in a state of urging the link portions 242 and 243 in the direction in which the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2.

  (A9) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the main body guide portion 251 is the main body elongated hole 251a, but the main body guide portion 251 has a convex portion protruding outward of the main body portion 241 or a concave portion inside. It may be formed by a concave portion. In this case, the lift stopper 252 of the main body guide portion 251 may be formed not by the ceiling surface 251b of the main body elongated hole 251a but by a convex portion or a concave portion.

  (A10) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, in the rack 333 as a moving member, the second shaft portion 245 moves in a state of being caught in the hooking hole 335, but the second shaft portion 245 does not move in the rack 333. It may move in a state of being caught by a convex portion protruding outward or a concave portion concaved inward. In this case, the first pushing portion and the second pushing portion that push the second shaft portion 245 may be formed not by the ceiling surface 335a or the bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335 but by a convex portion or a concave portion.

  (A11) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the driving force of the first driving unit 281 is applied to the first link unit 242 via the intermediate arm 261. The driving force may be applied to the first link portion 242 without passing through the intermediate arm 261. For example, the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281 is connected to the first shaft portion 244 via a gear or the like.

  (A12) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the drive source such as the motor that performs the rotary motion is the first drive unit 281 or the second drive unit 282, but the drive source that performs the linear motion is the first. It may be the first drive unit 281 or the second drive unit 282. For example, the drive source for performing the rectilinear motion is the second drive unit 282. In this configuration, the second driving unit 282 may directly apply the driving force to the second driving unit 282 without using the second transmission unit 302.

  (A13) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the rated torque of the first drive unit 281 is higher than that of the second drive unit 282, and the rated torque of the second drive unit 282 is higher than that of the first drive unit 281. Although the speed was increased, the rated torque of the second drive unit 282 may be higher than that of the first drive unit 281, and the rated speed of the first drive unit 281 is higher than that of the second drive unit 282. It may have been done. Further, the rated torque and the rated speed may be the same in the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282.

  Further, the driving force of the first drive unit 281 or the second drive unit 282 is converted by the first transmission unit 301 or the second transmission unit 302, so that the first link unit 242 or the second link unit 243 is rotated. The drive speed and drive torque for the above may be increased or decreased. For example, the speed transmission ratio of the first transmission unit 301 is set to be larger than that of the second transmission unit 302. In this configuration, even if the rated torque is the same between the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282, the drive torque of the drive force applied to the first link unit 242 is applied to the second link unit 243. The driving torque can be made larger than the driving torque. Further, the drive speed of the drive force applied to the second link portion 243 can be made higher than the drive speed of the drive force applied to the first link portion 242.

  Furthermore, the effect angle of the first drive unit 281 may be larger than the effect angle of the second drive unit 282.

  (A14) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are configured to start driving at the same time, but these drive units 281 and 281 have different timings. The driving may be started. For example, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are configured to be continuously driven at a predetermined interval (for example, 10 msec).

  In addition, after the first driving unit 281 starts driving, the second driving unit 282 starts driving when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this configuration, the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 rotate with the start of driving of the first drive part 281, and the second shaft part 245 rises from the lowermost position LA1 to push up the rack 333. It will be. Here, the predetermined condition is that the rack 333 has moved upward from the lowest position LA2.

  In this configuration, after the MPU 702 of the display control device 170 starts driving the first drive unit 281, the rack 333 moves upward from the lowest position LA2 based on the detection signal of the same rack sensor 337 of the second shaft unit 245. It is determined whether or not the first drive unit 281 has been moved to the upper position, and the drive of the first drive unit 281 is stopped, and then the second drive unit 282 is started to be driven. When the second drive unit 282 starts driving, the bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335 is caught by the second shaft portion 245 as the rack 333 moves upward, and the rack 333 pushes up the second shaft portion 245 in that state. Become. Therefore, even after the driving of the first drive unit 281 is stopped, the rotation of the link units 242 and 243 is continuously performed, whereby the movement rendering unit 243b moves to the rendering position PA2.

  According to this configuration, when the movement effect unit 243b is moved from the retracted position PA1 to the effect position PA2, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are sequentially driven at the timings where they do not overlap each other, so that power consumption is reduced. The peak value can be suppressed.

  (A15) In the above-described embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, when the intermediate arm 261 is bent while both the first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 are driving. Although the first driving unit 281 is configured to be stopped driving, the first driving unit 281 may be stopped driving when the movement rendering unit 243b reaches the driving stop position. For example, a configuration is provided in which a sensor that detects that the movement rendering unit 243b has reached the drive stop position is provided, and the drive of the first drive unit 281 is stopped based on the detection signal of the sensor. As this sensor, a sensor that detects the angle of the first link portion 242 with respect to the second link portion 243, a sensor that detects the rotation angle of the rotation shaft portion of the first drive portion 281, and a position of the second shaft portion 245 are detected. A sensor that does this is included.

  Further, when the ascending speed of the rack 333 due to the driving force of the second driving unit 282 exceeds the ascending speed of the second shaft portion 245 due to the driving force of the first driving unit 281, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped. It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the first drive unit 281 from acting like a dynamic brake.

  Further, when the intermediate arm 261 is bent, the transmission of the driving force from the first drive unit 281 to the intermediate arm 261 may be interrupted. For example, the arm-side gear 322 of the first transmission unit 301 has a gearless toothless portion. In this configuration, when the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the folded state, the toothless portion prevents the arm-side gear 322 from meshing with the first gear 321, and the driving force from the first drive unit 281 to the intermediate arm 261 is reduced. Transmission is cut off.

  (A16) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped first from the state in which both the first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 are driving. Although the driving of the second drive unit 282 is stopped after that, the driving of the second drive unit 282 may be stopped first, or the drive of the drive units 281 and 280 may be stopped at the same time.

  (A17) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is finished, the first drive unit 281 is started and stopped after being driven and stopped by the second drive unit 282. The order of may be reversed. In short, if the configuration is such that the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are sequentially driven at timings that do not overlap, compared to the configuration in which the drive units 281 and 282 are driven at timings that overlap, power consumption is reduced. The peak value of can be reduced.

  Further, the first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 may be driven at overlapping timings. For example, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are configured to start driving at the same time and stop driving at the same time.

  (B1) In the above embodiments, the first drive device 281 and the second drive part 282 are provided in the first decoration device 232, but only one of them may be provided. For example, only the first drive unit 281 is provided, and the driving force of the first drive unit 281 is transmitted through at least one of the first transmission unit 301 and the second transmission unit 302 to the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243. It is a structure given to. Even with this configuration, if the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts in accordance with the driving of the first drive unit 281, the link parts 242 and 243 can be rotated by the expansion and contraction of the intermediate arm 261.

  (B2) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the intermediate arm 261 has the two link parts 242 and 243, but it may have three or more link parts. Further, the link portions may relatively slide along the respective longitudinal directions, instead of relatively rotating. Even in this case, the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the contracted state by the sliding movement of the plurality of link portions in the overlapping direction, and the intermediate arm 261 slides in the direction in which the overlapping portions of the link portions are shortened. Will be in a stretched state.

  (B3) In the above embodiment, the intermediate arm 261 is connected between the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246 in the first link portion 242 of the first decoration device 232, but the intermediate arm 261 is , And may be connected to any part of the first link part 242. For example, the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the bulging portion 294 of the first link portion 242. Even in this case, the first link portion 242 rotates as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts.

  (B4) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the rendering position PA2 as the intermediate arm 261 extends, and retracts toward the retracted position PA1 by contracting the intermediate arm 261. Although it has moved, the movement rendering unit 243b may move toward the retreat position PA1 when the intermediate arm 261 extends, and may move toward the rendering position PA2 when the intermediate arm 261 contracts. For example, the intermediate arm 261 is not arranged on the side opposite to the effect position PA2 with the first link portion 242 interposed therebetween, but is arranged on the effect position PA2 side with respect to the first link portion 242. In this configuration, the main body side shaft portion 262 of the intermediate arm 261 is arranged closer to the performance position PA2 side than the link side shaft portion 263, and the intermediate arm 261 pulls the first link portion 242 toward the main body side shaft portion 262 side. Then, the movement rendering unit 243b moves toward the rendering position PA2.

  (B5) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are overlapped in the axial direction of the intermediate shaft portion 266. However, in this case, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 may be arranged side by side along the rotation direction of the arm portions 264 and 265. Also in this configuration, the intermediate arms 261 are in a contracted state by overlapping the arm portions 264 and 265 in parallel.

  (B6) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the main body side shaft portion 262 does not enter between the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241 regardless of the rotating state of the first link portion 242. Although the main body side shaft portion 262 may be disposed at the position, the main body side shaft portion 262 may be disposed at a position to enter between the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241 when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state.

  (B7) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the intermediate arm 261 in the contracted state abuts the reverse rotation stopper 269 from below so that the intermediate arm 261 (the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265). Although the rotation of the intermediate arm 261 is restricted, the rotation of the intermediate arm 261 may be restricted by contacting the contracted intermediate arm 261 with the reverse rotation stopper 269 from above. Also in this configuration, since the extension of the intermediate arm 261 is restricted by the reverse rotation stopper 269, the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate arm 261 can be appropriately managed by controlling the driving direction of the first drive unit 281.

  The reverse rotation stopper 269 may be provided on the first link portion 242, the first arm portion 264, and the second arm portion 265 instead of the main body portion 241. For example, the convex portion protruding from the second arm portion 265 toward the first arm portion 264 may be the reverse rotation stopper 269. With this configuration, when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the reverse rotation stopper 269 comes into contact with the first arm portion 264 from one side in the rotation direction of the first arm portion 264, so that the second arm portion 264 comes into contact. Rotation of the first arm portion 264 with respect to 265 is restricted.

  (B8) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, when the movement rendering unit 243b is in the rendering position PA2, the second link unit 243 is in the contraction regulation state that regulates the contraction of the intermediate arm 261. The second link portion 243 may always be in the contraction permission state without shifting to the contraction restriction state.

  (B9) In the above embodiment, in the intermediate arm 261 of the first decoration device 232, the intermediate shaft portion 266 slides along the second arm portion 265, but the intermediate shaft portion 266 does not move. It may be configured to slide along. That is, the arm elongated hole 265a may be formed in the first arm portion 264.

  (B10) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the intermediate arm 261 is provided side by side on the first link portion 242, but the intermediate arm 261 is provided between the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241. Alternatively, it may be provided between the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243.

  (C1) The configuration of the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233 may be the configurations of (a1) to (a10) as in the first decoration device 232. In this case, the main body portion, the first link portion, the second link portion, the first shaft portion, the second shaft portion, the third shaft portion, the spring member, the main body guide portion, the main body elongated hole, the rack, the hook hole, the effect. The position, the retracted position, and the like are replaced as they are, and the movement rendering unit 243b is replaced with the rotation rendering unit 403b.

  (C2) In the second decoration device 233, the link mechanism does not have to be constructed in a configuration in which the rotation of the second link part 243 is accelerated by the rotational force of the rotation effect part 403b. For example, the first link part 242 is not provided, and the link body 243a of the second link part 243 is used as an effect arm, and the effect arm rotates about the second shaft part 245 as an axis. Also in this configuration, the rotation speed of the effect arm can be increased by rotating the rotation effect unit 403b in accordance with the rotation of the effect arm.

  Further, in this case, the effect arm may be rotated in accordance with the sliding movement of the second shaft portion 245. For example, a gear is fixed to the second shaft portion 245, and a plurality of teeth that mesh with the gear are provided in the main body guide portion 251. In this configuration, the plurality of teeth of the main body guide portion 251 are arranged along the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 245, and when the second shaft portion 245 slides along the main body guide portion 251, the second The gear of the shaft portion 245 rotates and the effect arm rotates.

  (C3) In the above-described embodiment, in the second link unit 403 of the second decoration device 233, the rotation effecting unit 403b is arranged at the rotating tip of the link unit body 243a, but the rotation effecting unit 403b is the link unit body. It may be arranged in the middle part of 243a. For example, the rotation effecting unit 403b is arranged between the rotating tip of the link unit body 403a and the third shaft 406. In this configuration, the turning radius of the rotation effecting unit 403b may be smaller than the distance between the turning tip of the link body 243a and the effecting shaft 407. That is, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect part 403b does not have to project to the rotation front end side with respect to the link part body 403a.

  (C4) In the above embodiment, in the second link portion 403 of the second decoration device 233, the effect shaft portion 407 is arranged at a position overlapping the center of gravity of the rotation effect portion 403b. It may be arranged at a position not overlapping the center of gravity of the portion 403b. As this configuration, the effect shaft portion 407 is arranged at a position displaced from the central portion of the rotation effect portion 403b, or a structure in which a weight member is provided on one end side of both ends of the rotation effect portion 403b.

  In the configuration in which the effect production shaft portion 407 is arranged at a position displaced from the center of gravity of the rotation effect production portion 403b, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect production portion 403b is located at a position higher than the effect production shaft portion 407 in the center of gravity. Is preferably held at a zero angle in the orientation in which it is arranged. In this case, when the second special effect is executed, the rotation speed of the rotation effect unit 403b can be increased by using gravity that pulls the center of gravity of the rotation effect unit 403b to a position lower than that of the effect shaft unit 407. Therefore, the rotational force of the rotation effecting unit 403b is increased, and thereby the rotation speed of the second link unit 403 is also increased.

  The rotation effect unit 403b does not have to have an elongated shape, and may have, for example, a circular shape or a square shape.

  (C5) In the above-described embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the reverse rotation restricting means such as the reverse rotation stopper 469 and the upper cover body 465 is provided in the main body 401. It may be provided in the first link unit 402 or the second link unit 403. For example, the convex portion protruding from the first link portion 402 toward the second link portion 403 is used as the reverse rotation restricting means. With this configuration, when the rotation effecting unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the reverse rotation restricting means comes into contact with the side surface of the second link unit 403 opposite to the effecting position PB2, so that the first link unit 402 is moved. The rotation of the second link portion 403 is restricted.

  (C6) In the above embodiment, in the second link unit 403 of the second decoration device 233, the effect drive unit 475 is arranged on the opposite side of the effect shaft section 407 with the third shaft section 406 interposed therebetween. It suffices that the drive unit 475 be arranged at a position that does not overlap the effect shaft portion 407 or the third shaft portion 406. For example, the production drive unit 475 is arranged between the production shaft portion 407 and the third shaft portion 406. Also in this configuration, since the production drive unit 475 is arranged side by side with the production shaft unit 407 and the third shaft unit 406 in the direction intersecting the axis line of the production drive unit 475, the thickness dimension of the second link unit 403. Can be reduced.

  (C7) In the above-described embodiment, when the second special effect is executed, after the rack 493 reaches the unlock position LB3 along with the start of driving the link driving unit 442, the effect driving unit 475 starts driving. However, the configuration may be such that the performance driving unit 475 starts driving when a predetermined time has elapsed after the link driving unit 442 starts driving. The point is that after the rotation restriction by the lock mechanism is released, the effect drive unit 475 may start driving.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration drive unit 475 starts driving after the link driving unit 442 starts driving, but the driving units 442 and 475 may start driving at the same time. In this case, it is preferable that the rotation effecting unit 403b does not come into contact with other devices on the back side of the game board 60a even if the rotation effecting unit 403b starts rotating at the retracted position PB1.

  Even if the rotation effecting unit 403b at the retracted position PB1 does not have a zero angle, if the rotation effecting unit 403b does not come into contact with another device, the link driving unit 442 is started after the effecting driving unit 475 starts rotating. The rotation may be started. That is, the second link unit 243 may start rotating after the rotation effecting unit 403b starts rotating. Further, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect unit 403b may be in a state of extending in the direction intersecting with the second link unit 403. Furthermore, when the second special effect is finished, the link drive unit 442 is driven to move the rotation effect unit 403b to the retracted position PB1, and then the effect drive unit 475 is rotated to make the rotation effect unit 403b zero. You may shift to an angle.

  (D1) When the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation restricting member 511 is caught by the rack receiving portion 521 to restrict the rotation of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403. The link portions 402 and 403 may be rotated by their own weight. For example, when the second decoration device 233 is arranged at a position above the central opening 72 and the rotation restriction due to the catch of the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack receiving portion 521 is released, the rotation effecting unit 403b causes the rotation effecting unit 403b to move. The link portions 402 and 403 are configured to start rotating in the direction of moving to the (production position PB2) side. In this case, the link drive unit 442 and the spring member 451 may not be provided.

  (D2) In the above embodiment, the rotation restricting member 511 is arranged on the back side of the rack 493 in the second decoration device 233, but the rotation restricting member 511 is arranged on the front side of the rack 493. Alternatively, they may be arranged side by side on the rack 493. For example, in the configuration in which the rotation restricting member 511 is arranged side by side on the rack 493, it is preferable that the rack receiving portion 521 projects laterally from the rack 493 toward the rotation restricting member 511 side.

  (D3) In the above embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the first displacement portion is the regulation catching portion 515 of the rotation regulating member 511, and the second displacement portion is the rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493. The first displacing portion may be provided on a member that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion 402, and the second displacing portion is a member that is displaced with the rotation of the second link portion 403. It should be provided. For example, the first displacement portion is provided on the first link portion 402, and the second displacement portion is provided on the rack 493. In this configuration, the rack 493 is arranged so as to overlap the first shaft portion 404 in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401 regardless of the rotational state of the link portions 402 and 403, and the rotation effecting portion 403b moves to the retracted position PB1. As a result, the second displacement portion of the rack 493 is caught by the first displacement portion of the first link portion 402.

  (D4) In the above-described embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack 493 are housed inside the main body 401, but the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack 493 are not included in the main body 401. It may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the.

  (E1) In the above embodiment, the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 are arranged laterally of the central opening 72, but these decoration devices 232 and 233 are arranged above and below the central opening 72. It may have been done. With this configuration, in the decoration devices 232 and 233, the movement rendering unit 243b and the rotation rendering unit 403b move not in the gaming machine width direction but in the gaming machine height direction. In this case, the retreat positions PA1 and PB1 and the effect positions PA2 and PB2 are arranged side by side instead of side by side.

  (E2) In the above-described embodiment, in the decoration devices 232 and 233, when the movement rendering unit 243b and the rotation rendering unit 403b are at the retracted positions PA1 and PB1, the entire device is hidden behind the game board 60a. However, the movement rendering unit 243b and the rotation rendering unit 403b may not be at least partially hidden behind the game board 60a even when they are in the retracted positions PA1 and PB1. Even in this case, since the effect positions PA2 and PB2 are set closer to the center side of the central opening 72 than the retracted positions PA1 and PB1, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the moving effect effect unit 243b and the rotating effect unit 403b. ..

  (E3) The respective components of the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 may be combined. For example, the configuration of the second decoration device 233, which is a rotatable rotation effect unit 403b and an effect drive unit 475 that gives a driving force to the rotation effect unit 403b, may be mounted on the first decoration device 232. In addition, the configuration of the second decoration device 233 in which the rotation of the first link part 402 and the second link part 403 is restricted by the rotation restriction member 511 being caught by the rack receiving part 521 is the first decoration device 232. May be installed in.

  (E4) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

  Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of kinds of symbols in the circumferential direction is provided, the reel is started to rotate by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame to be openable and closable includes a storage portion and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined so that the reels start to rotate.

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
The invention of the following characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern when a player enters a ball entering part provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this pattern display device. By doing this, there is a game in which the degree of attention to the game is improved.

  Further, for example, by providing a production means including a light emitting portion and a movable body around the display screen, and by providing a predetermined correspondence between the production by the variable display of the design and the production by the production means, further attention is paid. An improved game machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention of the production means, the effect of the production means is limited only by operating the production means. Therefore, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention of the production means by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means. However, when the operation means is expanded in the operating range and the operation modes are diversified, the operation speed of the effecting means is reduced, which may impair the effect of effect by the effecting means. ..

Features A1. The first link portion (first link portion 242) and the second link portion (second link portion 243) are connected to the main body portion (main body portion 241) as a fixed link, and the first link portion and the second link portion A game machine provided with a link device (first decoration device 232) having a link mechanism by connecting and to each other,
The first link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a first shaft portion (first shaft portion 244),
The second link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a second shaft portion (second shaft portion 245) and the first link portion via the third shaft portion (third shaft portion 246). It is rotatably connected to the link part,
The first shaft portion is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion and the first link portion,
The second shaft portion is a slide shaft portion that is slidable along the main body portion or the second link portion,
The link device is
The gaming machine includes at least one of the first link section and the second link section, and the first link section and the second link section rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body section. A moving effect part (moving effect part 243b) capable of moving to an effect position (effect position PA2) visible from the front and an evacuation position (evacuation position PA1) retracted from the effect position;
A first drive part (first drive part 281) for rotating the first link part with respect to the main body part with the fixed shaft part as an axis;
A second drive unit (a second drive unit 282) that slides the slide shaft unit to rotate the second link unit with respect to the main body unit about the slide shaft unit as an axis;
A gaming machine characterized by having.

  With feature A1, since the link device has the link mechanism, the movement range of the movement rendering unit is expanded and the movement rendering is performed by rotating the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other. It is possible to diversify the operation mode of the unit. Therefore, by moving the movement effect part to the effect position, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement effect part.

  Here, in the link mechanism, the operation speed of the first link part and the second link part may be complicated, or the operation speed may be slowed due to operating a plurality of members in conjunction. I'm worried. When the rotation speed of the first link portion and the second link portion becomes slow, the movement speed of the movement effecting portion also becomes slow, and the movement effecting portion is brought to the effecting position even though the link mechanism is adopted to enhance the effect. The effect of moving is reduced.

  Further, in the configuration in which the driving force is applied to only the first link portion and the second link portion from one driving portion, one of the link portions is the driving link and the other is the driven link. Then, the driving link is in a state of operating the driven link. In this case, from the viewpoint of operating both the driving link and the driven link, it is preferable to select a motor or the like having a rated torque as large as possible as the drive unit, while from the viewpoint of operating these links at high speed, the rated speed is It is preferable to select a motor or the like as large as possible as the drive unit. Therefore, it is conceivable to manufacture a motor or the like having a large rated torque and a large rated speed as a dedicated product, but this will increase the cost burden.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic A1, since the first drive unit and the second drive unit are individually provided for the first link unit and the second link unit, the operation mode of each link unit, etc. A motor or the like selected individually according to the above can be set as the first drive unit and the second drive unit. Therefore, it is possible to select a motor or the like having the largest rated torque as one of the first and the second driving units and a motor or the like having the largest rated speed as the other driving unit. Become. As a result, even if a general-purpose motor or the like, which is not a dedicated product, is selected as the first drive unit or the second drive unit for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, the link mechanism is not affected by the drive force applied to the link mechanism. It is possible to secure the maximum speed required to quickly move the movement effect part to the effect position while ensuring the torque required for the operation. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the effect of the link device.

  Feature A2. Of the first drive unit and the second drive unit, one drive unit is a torque drive unit having a larger rated value of drive torque than the other drive unit, and the other drive unit is the torque drive unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, which is also a velocity driving unit having a large rated value of driving velocity.

  According to the characteristic A2, with respect to the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion, the torque drive portion can accelerate quickly, and the speed drive portion can improve the maximum speed. In other words, since the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit may play different roles, a general-purpose motor or the like can be selected as the torque drive unit or the speed drive unit.

  Features A3. In order to start moving the movement effecting unit from the retracted position toward the effecting position, a unit (a function for executing the process of step S102) for starting driving both the torque driving unit and the speed driving unit is provided. The game machine according to feature A2, which is characterized by being present.

  When the torque drive section and the speed drive section start driving the rotation shaft sections together, the torque drive section has a higher acceleration, and therefore the rotation speed of the rotation shaft section is somewhat increased from the start of the drive. Although the torque drive unit is larger than the speed drive unit until the period of, the speed drive unit will soon overtake the torque drive unit.

  Therefore, according to the characteristic A3, since the torque drive section and the speed drive section are started to drive together, the first link section and the second link section are driven by the driving force of the torque drive section until a certain period from the start of drive. After the rotation, and after the period has passed, the first link portion and the second link portion are rotated by the driving force of the speed driving portion. In this case, the period until the drive speed of the speed drive unit catches up with the drive speed of the torque drive unit is used as the period for accelerating the speed drive unit. Therefore, the speed of the moving effect part when the moving effect part moves from the retracted position to the effect position is selectively utilized by selectively using the driving force of the drive part having the higher driving speed between the torque drive part and the speed drive part. Can be planned.

  Features A4. While the torque drive unit is driving to move the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position, the movement effect unit is at a drive stop position (intermediate arm 261) in front of the effect position. Is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S104) for stopping the drive of the torque drive unit when the position reaches the position of the movement effecting unit 243b when the state shifts to the broken state). The gaming machine described in A2 or A3.

  After the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit start driving, when the torque drive unit precedes the torque drive unit with respect to the rotation speed of the rotary shaft unit, the first link unit and the second link unit are Since the torque drive unit is rotated by the drive force of the speed drive unit, the torque drive unit acts as a power generation brake by being driven, and inhibits the rotation of the first link unit and the second link unit. There is concern that they will exert their power.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic A4, after the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit start driving, the drive of the torque drive unit is stopped by the movement effecting unit reaching the drive stop position. Can be prevented from acting as a dynamic brake. As a result, with respect to the rotation speed of the rotary shaft portion, the rotational speeds of the first link portion and the second link portion are limited as the torque drive portion is driven after the speed drive portion has passed the preceding torque drive portion. It can be suppressed that it is done.

Features A5. Means for driving the speed driving unit to return the movement effecting unit at the effecting position to the retracted position (function of executing the process of step S108),
When the movement effecting unit reaches the switching position (the position of the movement effecting unit 243b when the rack 333 reaches the lowest position LA2) before the retracted position as the speed driving unit is driven, A means for stopping the driving of the speed drive section (a function for executing the processing of step S110);
The feature A2 to A4, further comprising means (a function of executing the process of step S111) for starting the drive of the torque drive unit after the drive of the speed drive unit is stopped. Game machine.

  According to the characteristic A5, when the movement effect unit is moved from the effect position to the retracted position, the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit are sequentially driven at timings that do not overlap each other. It is possible to suppress the peak value of power consumption as compared with a configuration in which both of the parts are driven at the same time to move the movement effecting part to the retracted position. Reducing the peak value of power consumption is effective in a game hall or the like in which a plurality of game machines are installed.

Features A6. The first drive unit, as the torque drive unit, rotates a predetermined first angle (production angle of the first drive unit 281) when moving the movement production unit from the retracted position to the production position. A motor,
The second drive unit serves as the speed drive unit, and when the movement production unit is moved from the retracted position to the production position, a predetermined second angle larger than the first angle (production of the second drive unit 282). Any of features A2 to A5 characterized in that the second motor rotates by an angle) and has a smaller rated value of rotational torque than the first motor and a greater rated value of rotational speed than the first motor. The game machine according to item 1.

  According to the characteristic A6, the rotation angle required for the movement effecting unit to move from the retracted position to the effecting position is larger in the second motor than in the first motor, so that the rotation speed of the second motor becomes the rated speed. The rotation angle required to reach can be secured. Accordingly, when the movement effecting unit moves to the effecting position, the maximum value of the performance of the second motor is exerted, so that the movement effecting unit can be moved at high speed.

Features A7. The link device is
It has a moving member (rack 333) that moves by the driving force of the speed driving unit and slides the second shaft by moving the speed driving unit.
The moving member is
A first pushing portion (bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement rendering unit moves to the rendering position;
A second pushing portion (ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement effecting portion returns to the retracted position;
Has
The second shaft portion is slidable along the movement direction of the second shaft portion between the first pushing portion and the second pushing portion, and features A2 to A6 are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of items.

  According to Feature A7, the second link portion is rotated by applying the driving force of the speed driving portion to the second shaft portion, and the first link portion is rotated by the driving force of the torque driving portion, Since the moving member that moves by the driving force of the speed driving unit can move relatively to the second shaft portion, it is possible to allow the moving member and the second shaft portion to have different moving speeds. it can. In this case, after the speed drive unit and the torque drive unit start to drive, the torque drive unit via each link unit during the period in which the torque drive unit is faster than the speed drive unit with respect to the rotation speed of each rotating shaft unit. It is possible to make the moving speed of the second shaft part that is moved by the driving force of the drive speed faster than the moving speed of the moving member that is moved by the driving force of the speed driving part. Therefore, unlike the configuration in which the moving member cannot move relative to the second shaft portion, for example, it is possible to prevent the moving speed of the second shaft portion from becoming slower in accordance with the slow driving speed of the speed driving unit. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the magnitude of the acceleration of the torque drive unit to realize high-speed movement of the movement effect unit immediately after the movement effect unit starts moving.

  Feature A8. The game machine according to feature A7, wherein a moving direction of the second shaft portion with respect to the moving member is the same as a moving direction of the moving member.

  According to the characteristic A8, since the moving direction of the moving member and the moving direction of the second shaft portion coincide with each other, the moving speed of the speed driving section exceeds the driving speed of the preceding torque driving section, In the situation where the first pushing portion of the member pushes the second shaft portion, it is less likely that a loss will occur in the force of the first pushing portion pushing the second shaft portion. Therefore, the driving force of the speed driving unit can be efficiently used when moving the movement effecting unit at high speed.

Feature A9. The link device is
It has a pinion gear (pinion gear 332) that rotates with the driving of the speed driving unit,
The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8, wherein the moving member is a long rack (rack 333) having a plurality of teeth that mesh with the teeth of the pinion gear.

  According to the characteristic A9, since the rack that moves linearly is used as the moving member, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the moving direction of the moving member matches the moving direction of the slide shaft portion. Moreover, since the drive force of the speed drive unit is applied to the rack via the pinion gear, loss of drive force is less likely to occur when converting the rotational movement of the speed drive unit into the linear movement of the rack.

  Feature A10. A biasing means for biasing at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion so as to rotate the first link portion and the second link portion in a direction in which the movement rendering portion moves to the rendering position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9, characterized in that it is provided with a biasing means (spring member 291).

  According to the characteristic A10, since the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link portion and the second link portion in addition to the respective driving forces of the first drive portion and the second drive portion, the movement effect portion is provided at the effect position. When moving to, it is possible to further speed up.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the biasing means applies the biasing force to each link portion in the direction in which the movement rendering unit moves to the rendering position, the movement rendering unit is in the retracted position as compared with the case where the movement rendering unit is in the rendering position. The biasing force of the biasing means is likely to increase. Therefore, when each link part rotates in the direction in which the movement effect part moves to the retracted position, a larger torque is required to rotate each link part as the movement effect part approaches the retracted position.

  Therefore, it is preferable to apply this feature to the feature A5. In this case, in the moving range where the biasing force is relatively small (range from the effect position to the switching position), each link part is rotated by the driving force of the speed driving unit, and the moving range where the biasing force is relatively large (from the switching position In the range up to the retracted position), by rotating each link by the driving force of the torque drive unit, each link can be swung swiftly to move the movement rendering unit to the retracted position as quickly as possible.

Features A11. Means for driving one drive unit of the first drive unit and the second drive unit to return the movement effect unit in the effect position to the retracted position (function of executing the process of step S108),
When the movement rendering unit reaches the switching position (the position of the movement rendering unit 243b when the rack 333 reaches the lowest position LA2) before the retracted position, the one that has been driven to the switching position Means for stopping the drive unit (function for executing the process of step S110),
A means (a function for executing the process of step S111) for starting the driving of the driving unit that has not been driven to the switching position after the driving of the driving unit that has been driving to the switching position is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A10.

  According to the characteristic A11, by moving the first driving unit and the second driving unit in sequence, the movement effecting unit can be moved from the effecting position to the retracted position. Therefore, for example, the first driving unit and the second driving unit. Compared with a configuration in which both driving units are driven simultaneously to move the movement effecting unit to the retracted position, the peak value of power consumption can be suppressed in a game hall or the like in which a plurality of the gaming machines are installed.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the first drive unit and the second drive unit are both provided in the main body unit.

  According to the characteristic A12, since the first drive section and the second drive section are mounted on the main body section, compared with the configuration in which these drive sections are mounted on the first link section and the second link section, for example, It is possible to reduce the weight of the link portion. In this case, a motor or the like having a small rated torque and a large rated speed can be selected as the first driving unit or the second driving unit, so that the moving speed of the movement rendering unit can be improved.

  Feature A13. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the first shaft portion is arranged on an extension of a movement line of the second shaft portion.

  According to the characteristic A13, even when the second shaft portion of the link mechanism moves to the dead center, the first drive portion can determine the rotation directions of the first link portion and the second link portion. Therefore, unlike the configuration in which only the driving force of the second driving unit of the first driving unit and the second driving unit is applied to the first link unit and the second link unit, the movement rendering unit is in the retracted position. In this case, it is possible to prevent the link parts from rotating in the direction in which the movement effecting part is moved to the side opposite to the effecting position. Therefore, by utilizing the dead center of the second shaft portion, it is possible to properly operate the first link portion and the second link portion even with the link mechanism that secures the movement range of the movement rendering portion as large as possible. ..

<Feature B group>
The invention of the following characteristic group B is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern when a player enters a ball entering part provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this pattern display device. By doing this, there is a game in which the degree of attention to the game is improved.

  Further, for example, by providing a production means including a light emitting portion and a movable body around the display screen, and by providing a predetermined correspondence between the production by the variable display of the design and the production by the production means, further attention is paid. An improved game machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention of the production means, the effect of the production means is limited only by operating the production means. Therefore, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention of the production means by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means. However, when the operation means is expanded in the operating range and the operation modes are diversified, the operation speed of the effecting means is reduced, which may impair the effect of effect by the effecting means. ..

Feature B1. The first link portion (first link portion 242) and the second link portion (second link portion 243) are connected to the main body portion (main body portion 241) as a fixed link, and the first link portion and the second link portion A game machine provided with a link device (first decoration device 232) having a link mechanism by connecting and to each other,
The first link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a first shaft portion (first shaft portion 244),
The second link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a second shaft portion (second shaft portion 245) and the first link portion via the third shaft portion (third shaft portion 246). It is rotatably connected to the link part,
The first shaft portion is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion and the first link portion,
The second shaft portion is a slide shaft portion that is slidable along the main body portion or the second link portion,
The link device is
The gaming machine includes at least one of the first link section and the second link section, and the first link section and the second link section rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body section. A moving effect part (moving effect part 243b) capable of moving to an effect position (effect position PA2) visible from the front and an evacuation position (evacuation position PA1) retracted from the effect position;
The first shaft in the first link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a main body side shaft portion (main body side shaft portion 262) and also via a link side shaft portion (link side shaft portion 263). Rotatably connected to an intermediate position between the first shaft part and the third shaft part, the first body part and the first link part are connected to each other, and the first link part is expanded and contracted to thereby connect the first body part to the first body part. An intermediate arm (intermediate arm 261) capable of rotating the link portion,
A telescopic drive unit (first drive unit 281) that applies a drive force for extending and contracting the intermediate arm to the intermediate arm;
A gaming machine characterized by having.

  With the feature B1, since the link device has the link mechanism, the movement range of the movement rendering unit is expanded and the movement rendering is performed by rotating the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other. It is possible to diversify the operation mode of the unit. Therefore, by moving the movement effect part to the effect position, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement effect part.

  Here, in the link mechanism, the operation speed of the first link part and the second link part may be complicated, or the operation speed may be slowed due to operating a plurality of members in conjunction. I'm worried. When the rotation speed of the first link portion and the second link portion becomes slow, the movement speed of the movement effecting portion also becomes slow, and the movement effecting portion is brought to the effecting position even though the link mechanism is adopted to enhance the effect. The effect of moving is reduced.

  Further, in the link mechanism, in the structure in which the driving force is applied to the shaft portion as the joint, it is necessary to apply a large driving force to the shaft portion in order to secure the torque required to rotate the link portion. is there. However, from the viewpoint of applying a large driving force from the drive unit to the shaft unit, it is preferable to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as the drive unit, while from the viewpoint of operating the link mechanism at high speed, the rated speed is It is preferable to select a motor or the like as large as possible as the drive unit. Therefore, it is conceivable to manufacture a motor or the like having a large rated torque and a large rated speed as a dedicated product, but this will increase the cost burden.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B1, since the driving force is applied to the intermediate position of the first link portion via the intermediate arm, the driving force is applied to the first shaft portion and the third shaft portion of the first link portion. Compared to the structure in which force is applied, the torque for rotating the first link portion is increased by the amount that the connecting position of the intermediate arm to the first link portion is separated from the first shaft portion and the third shaft portion. Can be large. For this reason, even if a motor with a relatively large rated torque is selected as the expansion / contraction driving unit that applies a driving force to the first link via the intermediate arm, the first link can be selected even if the rated torque is relatively small. It is possible to secure a torque for rotating the unit, and accordingly, it is possible to select a unit having a slightly higher rated speed as the expansion / contraction driving unit. In this case, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if a general-purpose motor instead of a dedicated product is selected as the expansion / contraction drive unit, the driving force applied to the link mechanism is required to operate the link mechanism. While securing the torque, it is possible to secure the speed required to quickly move the movement rendering unit to the rendering position. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the effect of the link device.

  Feature B2. The game machine according to feature B1, wherein the intermediate arm expands and contracts when a driving force is transmitted from the expansion and contraction drive unit, and rotates the first link unit in accordance with the expansion and contraction.

  According to the feature B2, since the intermediate arm expands and contracts, even if the intermediate arm is connected to the intermediate position of the first link portion, the intermediate arm does not limit the rotation range of the first link portion, and the intermediate arm extends and contracts. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the driving force of 1 is transmitted to the first link portion.

  The intermediate arm rotates the first link portion in a direction to move the movement effecting unit to the retracted position, and contracts to move the movement effecting unit to the effecting position. It is preferable to rotate the first link portion. With this configuration, the intermediate arm extends to push out the first link portion, thereby moving the movement rendering unit toward the rendering position. In this case, since it is not necessary to dispose the intermediate arm on the effect position side with respect to the first link portion, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the rotation range of the first link portion is not restricted by the intermediate arm.

Feature B3. The intermediate arm is
A first arm portion (first arm portion 264) that rotates about the main body side shaft portion;
A second arm portion (second arm portion 265) that rotates about the link-side shaft portion;
An intermediate shaft portion (intermediate shaft portion 266) that connects the first arm portion and the second arm portion in a relatively rotatable state;
And the first arm portion and the second arm portion are relatively rotated about the intermediate shaft portion in a direction in which the first arm portion and the second arm portion are folded to contract, and the first arm portion and the second arm portion are relatively rotated in a direction in which the folding is canceled. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, which is extended by rotating.

  According to the feature B3, the intermediate arm expands and contracts when each of the first arm portion and the second arm portion rotates about the intermediate shaft portion. Therefore, for example, a motor or the like that performs a rotational movement is selected as the extension / contraction driving unit. In such a case, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the driving force applied to the intermediate arm is converted into the extension / contraction motion of the intermediate arm by rotating the rotary shaft portion of the extension / contraction driving unit. In addition, since the second arm section rotates when the intermediate arm expands and contracts, even if the second arm section is connected to the first link section that also rotates, the second arm section rotates the first link section. It can be avoided that it interferes with dynamic movement.

Feature B4. The intermediate arm is
The movement effecting unit moves to an extended state by extending until it moves to the effecting position, and moves to a contracted state by contracting until the movement effecting unit moves to the retracted position, and the intermediate arm moves to the contracted state. In one case, the first arm portion and the second arm portion extend along the moving direction of the link-side shaft portion accompanying the rotation of the first link portion in a state of being folded over each other. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the movement rendering unit restricts rotation of the first link portion in a direction in which the movement rendering unit moves to the rendering position.

  According to the feature B4, the intermediate arm can restrict the rotation of the first link portion by shifting to the contracted state. Therefore, for example, even without using a dedicated member that operates independently of the first link portion and the second link portion, the movement rendering unit in the retracted position may unintentionally move toward the rendering position. Can be regulated. In this case, it is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated in realizing a link mechanism that can appropriately move the movement effecting unit.

  Feature B5. In the characteristic B4, the intermediate arm is in a state in which the second arm portion extends from the first link portion toward a side opposite to the effect position when in the contracted state. The game machine described.

  According to Feature B5, when the movement effecting unit is at the retracted position, the second arm unit extends toward the side opposite to the rotation direction of the first link unit, so that the intermediate arm is the first arm unit. The rotation of the first link portion can be restricted in a state where neither the second arm portion nor the second position protrudes toward the effect position side. Moreover, in this case, a configuration can be realized in which the intermediate arm expands and contracts on the side opposite to the production position with the first link portion sandwiched, regardless of the position of the movement production unit, and therefore in the rotation direction of the first link portion. The intermediate arms can be arranged side by side on the first link. Thereby, for example, the thickness dimension of the link device can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the intermediate arm is arranged between the first link portion and the main body portion. Reducing the thickness of the link device is effective in installing the link device in a limited area inside the gaming machine.

Feature B6. The link device is
A reverse rotation restricting portion (reverse rotation stopper 269) for restricting one of the rotation directions of the second arm portion with respect to the first arm portion when the intermediate arm transitions from the contracted state to the extended state. The gaming machine described in the feature B4 or B5, which has the feature.

  In the intermediate arm, when the intermediate arm shifts from the contracted state to the extended state, the second arm portion is rotatable about the main body side shaft portion on both the first shaft portion side and the third shaft portion side. ing. Therefore, when the extension / contraction drive unit is driven, the extension / contraction drive unit drives the extension / contraction state, and if the extension / contraction drive unit is not stopped, the intermediate arm unit extends again from the contraction state. Therefore, it is impossible to determine whether the intermediate arm is in the extended state or the contracted state only by the driving direction of the telescopic drive unit.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B6, since the rotation of the second arm portion is restricted by the reverse rotation restricting portion, the intermediate arm is limited to the case where the telescopic drive portion is driven in the specific direction (forward direction). And expands and contracts only when driven in the opposite direction (reverse direction) to a specific direction. Therefore, the extension / contraction state of the intermediate arm can be appropriately managed by controlling the drive direction of the extension / contraction drive unit.

Feature B7. Arm transmission means (first transmission portion 301) for transmitting the driving force of the expansion / contraction drive portion to the second arm portion,
Any one of the characteristics B3 to B6, wherein the intermediate arm is expanded and contracted by the second arm section pivoting on the main body side shaft section by a driving force of the expansion and contraction drive section. A gaming machine according to item.

  According to Feature B7, since the driving force of the extension / contraction drive unit is applied to the second arm unit, the arm transmission unit is connected to each of the rotation shaft unit of the extension / contraction drive unit and the main body side shaft unit of the second arm unit. It only has to be configured so as to include a gear or the like. In this case, since the extension / contraction drive unit and the arm transmission unit can be mounted on the main body unit, for example, the structure of the link device is larger than the configuration in which the extension / contraction drive unit and the arm transmission unit are mounted on the first link unit. Can be simplified.

Feature B8. In the second link portion, the rotation angle of the second link portion with respect to the first link portion and the main body portion is changed by the driving force of the extension / contraction drive portion when the movement rendering portion moves to the rendering position. It moves to a contraction regulation state that is sized to regulate the contraction of the intermediate arm,
Even when the second link portion is in the contraction-restricted state, by transmitting the driving force to the second link portion in the direction in which the movement effecting portion moves to the retracted position, the second link portion is expanded and contracted. The link transmission means (second transmission portion 302) for shifting to a contraction permission state in which the contraction of the intermediate arm is permitted by the driving force of the portion is provided, and any one of features B3 to B7 is described. Game machine.

  According to Feature B8, the second link portion with respect to the first link portion reaches a predetermined angle, and therefore, the contraction of the intermediate arm causes the movement effecting portion to rotate the first link portion in the direction to move to the retracted position. It becomes impossible to do it. That is, the movement effect part is held at the effect position by the intermediate arm. In this case, since the movement effecting unit in the effect position is unintentionally moved toward the retracted position, even if the drive of the expansion and contraction drive unit is stopped after the movement effecting unit moves to the effect position, It is possible to properly manage the position of the movement rendering unit.

  Further, even when the movement rendering unit is held at the rendering position by the intermediate arm, the driving force is applied to the second link unit from the link transmission means in the direction in which the movement rendering unit moves to the retracted position, and thus the intermediate arm. It is possible to cancel the holding of the position of the movement effecting unit. In this way, since the rotation restriction of the first link portion by the intermediate arm can be released by utilizing a part of the operation of the link mechanism of the rotation of the second link portion, for example, it operates independently of the link mechanism. It is possible to suppress the configuration of the link device from becoming complicated as compared with the configuration in which the position holding of the movement rendering unit is released by the dedicated member.

Feature B9. The intermediate arm is
The intermediate shaft portion has an arm guide portion (arm long hole 265a) that enables slide movement along at least one of the longitudinal directions of the first arm portion and the second arm portion and guides the slide movement. And
When the second link portion is in the contraction-restricted state, the intermediate shaft portion is oriented such that the movement effecting portion is moved to the retracted position by the transmission of the driving force from the link transmission means. The game machine according to feature B8, wherein the game machine slides along the arm guide portion when the game machine rotates.

  According to Feature B9, when the intermediate arm expands and contracts, in addition to the case where the first arm section rotates relatively to the second arm section about the intermediate shaft section, the first arm section moves There is a case where it slides with respect to the second arm portion along with the arm guide portion. Here, when the first arm portion slides in the direction in which it overlaps with the second arm portion, the intermediate arm contracts without rotating the second arm portion, so the movement effecting portion at the effect position moves to the retracted position. It is possible to rotate the first link portion in the direction of turning. Therefore, even when the intermediate arm is in the extended state, the second link portion can be rotated, and as a result, the rotation restriction of the first link portion by the intermediate arm can be released.

  Feature B10. When the second link portion shifts to the contraction permitted state due to the transmission of the driving force from the link transmission means, the movement rendering portion rotates the first link portion in the direction to move to the retracted position. In order to start the game, the game according to the feature B8 or B9, characterized by having a contraction control means (a function of executing the process of step S111) that drives the expansion / contraction drive unit in a direction in which the intermediate arm is contracted. Machine.

  According to Feature B10, even if the intermediate arm cannot be contracted by the driving force of the contraction drive unit because the second link unit is in the contraction-restricted state, the second link unit is moved to the contraction-permitted state. As a result, the intermediate arm can be contracted by the driving force of the contraction driving unit. In this case, the contraction driving unit exerts a driving force in the opposite direction to the case where the movement effecting unit is moved to the effecting position, so that the movement effecting unit moves toward the retracted position. It is not necessary to install a dedicated drive unit for moving the vehicle to the retracted position. This makes it possible to reduce the cost burden even in the configuration in which the rotation of the first link portion is restricted by utilizing the structure of the link mechanism.

Feature B11. A means for stopping the transmission of the driving force from the link transmission means to the second link portion when the second link portion shifts to the contraction permission state with the transmission of the driving force from the link transmission means ( Function for executing the process of step S110),
The game according to the feature B10, wherein the shrinkage control unit starts driving the expansion / contraction drive unit after the transmission of the driving force from the link transmission unit to the second link unit is stopped. Machine.

  According to the feature B11, when the movement effect unit is moved from the effect position to the retracted position, the timing of applying the driving force to the second link portion and the timing of applying the driving force to the intermediate arm do not overlap, so that, for example, The peak value of power consumption can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the driving force is simultaneously applied to the second link portion and the intermediate arm. Reducing the peak value of power consumption is effective in a game hall or the like in which a plurality of game machines are installed.

Feature B12. The second link portion has a protruding portion (a protruding portion 271) protruding from the first shaft portion toward the side opposite to the second shaft portion,
The movement rendering unit is configured by the second link unit including at least the protruding portion,
The first link portion is at a position that is inserted between the movement rendering portion and the main body portion when the movement rendering portion is at the retracted position,
The first link portion and the intermediate arm are arranged side by side with each other, and are in a state of being respectively inserted between the projecting portion and the main body portion when the movement rendering portion is in the retracted position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B11.

  According to Feature B12, in the configuration in which the movement rendering unit is formed by the second link unit, both the first link unit and the intermediate arm are arranged on the back side of the second link unit, so that the movement rendering unit Regardless of the position, it is possible to realize a state in which the first link portion and the intermediate arm are difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine.

  Moreover, since the intermediate arm is arranged side by side on the first link portion, the thickness dimension of the link device can be reduced as compared with, for example, a configuration in which the intermediate arm is arranged at a position overlapping the front and rear sides of the first link portion. Reducing the thickness of the link device is effective in installing the link device in a limited area inside the gaming machine.

<Characteristic C group>
The invention of the following characteristic group C is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern when a player enters a ball entering part provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this pattern display device. By doing this, there is a game in which the degree of attention to the game is improved.

  Further, for example, by providing a production means including a light emitting portion and a movable body around the display screen, and by providing a predetermined correspondence between the production by the variable display of the design and the production by the production means, further attention is paid. An improved game machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention of the production means, the effect of the production means is limited only by operating the production means. Therefore, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention of the production means by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means. However, when the operation means is expanded in the operating range and the operation modes are diversified, the operation speed of the effecting means is reduced, which may impair the effect of effect by the effecting means. ..

Feature C1. A main body (main body 401) attached to a predetermined attachment target (unit main body 231),
An effect arm (link part main body 403a of the second link part 403) rotatably connected to the main body part via an arm shaft part (second shaft part 405),
An effect position (effect position PB2) which is provided on the front end side of rotation of the effect arm and becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine as the effect arm rotates, and a retracted position (retracted from the effect position) A game machine provided with a production device (second decoration device 233) having a movement production unit (rotation production unit 403b) capable of moving to a position PB1),
The movement effect section is rotatably connected to the effect arm via an effect axis section (effect axis section 407).
The production device is
An arm drive section (link drive section 442) for rotating the effect arm with respect to the main body section about the arm shaft section;
An effect drive section (effect drive section 475) for rotating the movement effect section with respect to the effect arm about the effect axis section,
A gaming machine characterized by having.

  In the feature C1, since the movable effect unit that is rotatable is attached to the rotatable effect arm, the moving range of the movable effect unit is expanded by operating both the effect arm and the movable effect unit. In addition, it is possible to diversify the operation mode of the movement production unit. Therefore, by moving the movement effect part to the effect position, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement effect part.

  Here, in the configuration in which the movement rendering unit is provided on the side of the rotation tip of the rendering arm, there is a concern that the rotation speed of the rendering arm may be slowed due to the weight of the movement rendering unit. The slower rotation speed of the effect arm means that the moving speed of the movement effect section becomes slower, and the move effect section is arranged at the tip side of the effect arm in order to enhance the effect effect. The effect of moving the part to the effect position is reduced.

  Further, for example, in a configuration in which the production arm is driven and the movement production unit is rotated by the driving force of one drive unit, in order to secure the torque required to operate both the production arm and the movement production unit. It is necessary to apply a large driving force to the production arm and the movement production unit. However, from the viewpoint of operating both the production arm and the movement production unit, it is preferable to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as the drive unit, while rotating the production arm and the movement production unit at high speed. From the viewpoint of that, it is preferable to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the drive unit. Therefore, it is conceivable to manufacture a motor or the like having a large rated torque and a large rated speed as a dedicated product, but this will increase the cost burden.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic C1, since the driving force is individually applied to the effect arm and the movement effect section from the arm drive section and the effect drive section, the respective operation modes of the effect arm and the movement effect section, etc. A motor or the like individually selected according to the above can be set as the arm drive unit and the performance drive unit. Therefore, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as the arm drive unit and a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the production drive unit. In this case, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if you select a general-purpose motor instead of a dedicated product as the arm drive section or the performance drive section, you can move while ensuring the torque required to operate the production arm. It is possible to secure the rotation speed required to enhance the effect of the effect produced by the rotation of the effect unit.

  Moreover, when the effect arm rotates toward the effect position, by rotating the movement effect part in accordance with the rotation direction of the effect arm, the rotational force of the movement effect part can be increased in speed of rotation of the effect arm. Can be used. For example, by rotating the movement effecting unit in the same direction as the direction of movement of the effect arm on the rotation tip side, the movement of the effect arm on the rotation tip side is likely to be accelerated by the rotation of the movement effecting unit. In this case, since the movement effect unit appears at the effect position at high speed, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movement effect unit.

  As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the effect of the effect device.

  Feature C2. When the arm driving unit drives to move the movement rendering unit from the retracted position toward the rendering position, the same direction as the direction in which the rendering arm rotates in accordance with the driving of the arm driving unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, further comprising a rotation start unit (a function for executing the process of step S204) that drives the rendering drive unit so that the movement rendering unit rotates.

  According to the characteristic C2, when the movement rendering unit starts moving toward the rendering position, the rotation direction of the movement rendering unit is set to be the same as the rotation direction of the rendering arm. The rotation of the production arm can be accelerated.

  Feature C3. The movement rendering unit is formed in an elongated shape, extends along the rendering arm and has one end of the movement rendering unit pivoting of the rendering arm more than the rendering shaft portion when in the retracted position. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the gaming machine is held in a posture in which it projects toward the tip end side.

  According to feature C3, when the movement effect unit is stored in the retracted position, the movement effect unit is in a state of overlapping with the effect arm along the effect arm, so that the movement effect unit extends in the direction intersecting with the effect arm. The storage space for the effect arm and the movement effect section can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the effect is stored in the closed state.

  Moreover, when the movement rendering unit is in the retracted position, the upper end portion of the movement rendering unit is arranged at a position projecting more toward the tip side of the rotation than the upper end portion of the rendering arm. The upper end portion of the movement rendering unit is larger than the upper end portion of the rendering arm. In this case, for example, as compared with a configuration in which the upper end portion of the movement rendering unit is located closer to the rendering axis portion than the upper end portion of the rendering arm, the upper end portion of the movement rendering unit moves as the movement rendering unit rotates. In this case, since the inertial force generated at the upper end of the effect arm becomes large, it is possible to increase the rotation speed of the effect arm.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the effect shaft portion is arranged at a central portion in the longitudinal direction of the movement effect portion.

  According to the characteristic C4, it is possible to prevent the center of gravity of the movement rendering unit from moving as the movement rendering unit rotates. In this case, in a configuration in which the movement rendering unit rotates while the rendering arm rotates, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the rendering arm from increasing or decreasing due to the movement of the center of gravity of the moving rendering unit, so that the rendering arm is in a stable state. It can be rotated with.

Feature C5. In order to move the movement effecting unit from the retracted position toward the effecting position, means for starting driving of the arm driving unit (function of executing the process of step S202) is provided,
The game machine according to the feature C4, wherein the rotation start means starts driving the effect drive unit to rotate the movement effect unit after the arm drive unit is driven. ..

  In the configuration in which the effect production shaft section is arranged in the central portion of the movement effect production unit, when the movement effect production unit is rotated in the retracted position, the lower end portion of the movement effect production unit sandwiches the movement effect production unit inside the gaming machine. There is concern that it may come into contact with another device or the like arranged on the side opposite to the presentation position.

  On the other hand, according to the feature C5, after the effect arm starts to rotate in the direction in which the movement effect section moves to the effect position, the rotation of the movement effect section is started. In this case, since the movement rendering unit rotates at a position separated from other devices or the like, it is possible to prevent the lower end of the movement rendering unit from contacting other devices or the like. That is, it is possible to prevent the movement rendering unit and other devices from being damaged or deformed.

Feature C6. The arm shaft is slidable along the body,
The effect device has a configuration in which the effect arm rotates with respect to the main body unit as the arm shaft unit slides.
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5, wherein the arm drive unit slides the arm shaft.

  With feature C6, the arm shaft portion slides along the main body portion, whereby the movement range of the movement effecting portion can be expanded. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the movement rendering unit.

  Here, in the configuration in which the arm shaft section slides by the driving force of the arm drive section, it is considered preferable to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the arm drive section in order to move the movement effecting section at high speed. .. However, in a motor or the like having a high rated speed, the rated torque is apt to be small, and when this motor or the like is selected as the arm driving unit, when the effect arm is started to rotate from the state in which the movement effector is in the retracted position, the effect is produced. There is concern that the acceleration of the arm will decrease.

  On the other hand, since this feature is applied to the configuration in which the rotation speed of the effect arm is increased by utilizing the rotational force of the movement effect unit, the movement effect unit is rotated at the start of the rotation of the effect arm. As a result, the acceleration of the rotation of the production arm can be increased. As a result, even if a motor or the like having a low rated speed is selected as the arm drive unit, it becomes possible to supplement the shortage of the rated torque of the motor or the like with the rotational force of the movement rendering unit.

Feature C7. The production device is
A first link part (first link part 402) and a second link part (second link part 403) are connected to the main body part as a fixed link part, and the first link part and the second link part are mutually connected. It has a link mechanism configured by being connected,
The first link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a first shaft portion (first shaft portion 404),
The second link part has the effect arm and the movement effect part,
The effect arm is rotatably connected to the main body portion via the arm shaft portion as a second shaft portion (second shaft portion 405), and via the third shaft portion (third shaft portion 406). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the gaming machine is rotatably connected to the first link portion.

  According to the characteristic C7, in the effect device, it is possible to realize a structure in which the effect arm rotates with respect to the main body unit in accordance with the sliding movement of the arm shaft unit by constructing the link mechanism. In the link mechanism, by rotating the first link portion and the second link portion in conjunction with each other, it is possible to extend the movement range of the movement rendering unit and diversify the movement mode of the movement rendering unit. become.

  Feature C8. Rotation of at least one of the effect arm and the first link part so that the third shaft part does not move on an extension line of the moving direction of the second shaft part when the movement effecting part is in the retracted position. The game machine according to feature C7, which is provided with a reverse rotation regulating means (reverse rotation stopper 469, upper cover body 465) for regulating the above.

  In the link mechanism in which the first link portion and the second link portion rotate in association with each other, there is a possibility that each link portion rotates in a direction in which the movement effecting unit in the retracted position moves to the side opposite to the effecting position. There is. In this case, there is a concern that the second link unit and the first link unit including the movement rendering unit may contact another device or the like arranged inside the gaming machine on the side opposite to the rendering position with the movement rendering unit interposed therebetween. To be done.

  On the other hand, according to the characteristic C8, since the rotations of the first link portion and the second link portion are restricted by the reverse rotation restriction means, the movement effecting part at the retracted position is located on the side opposite to the effecting part. It is possible to prevent the effect arm included in the second link portion from rotating in the moving direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second link portion and the first link portion from coming into contact with other devices or the like. That is, it is possible to prevent the link mechanism and other devices from being damaged or deformed.

Feature C9. The reverse rotation restricting means,
A first restricting portion (reverse rotation stopper 469) for restricting rotation of the effect arm by contacting a portion of the effect arm between the third shaft portion and the arm shaft portion;
A second restricting portion (upper cover body 465) that restricts rotation of the effect arm by contacting a portion of the effect arm opposite to the arm axis part with the third axis part interposed therebetween;
A gaming machine according to feature C8, which has:

  According to Feature C9, in the effect arm, the first restricting portion abuts on a portion on the rotation base end side of the third shaft portion, and the second regulating portion on a part on the rotation tip end side of the third shaft portion. Since the rotation is restricted by the contact of the parts, it is possible to more reliably suppress the reverse rotation of the effect arm.

  Feature C10. A biasing means for biasing at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion so as to rotate the first link portion and the second link portion in a direction in which the movement rendering portion moves to the rendering position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C7 to C9, characterized in that it is provided with a biasing means (spring member 451).

  According to the characteristic C10, since the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link part and the second link part in addition to the driving force of the arm drive part and the rotational force of the movement effecting part, the movement effecting part has the effect position. When moving to, it is possible to further speed up.

  Feature C11. In the effect arm, the effect drive unit and the effect shaft unit are provided side by side along a direction intersecting the axial direction of the effect shaft unit, and the effect drive unit and the effect shaft unit are provided. The game according to any one of the features C1 to C10, characterized in that an effect transmission section (effect transmission section 476) for transmitting the driving force of the effect drive section to the effect shaft section is provided therebetween. Machine.

  According to the characteristic C11, in the effect arm, the movement effector and the effect driver are arranged at positions that do not overlap with each other along the axial direction of the effect shaft, so that the effect effect is moved along the axis of the effect shaft, for example. The thickness dimension of the rendering device can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the section and the rendering driving section are arranged at the overlapping position. Reducing the thickness dimension of the rendering device is effective in installing the rendering device in a limited area inside the game machine.

  Feature C12. The gaming machine according to Feature C11, wherein the effect drive unit is arranged at a position that does not overlap the movement effect unit regardless of a rotation angle of the movement effect unit in the axial direction of the effect axis unit.

  According to Feature C12, the separation distance between the effect shaft section and the effect drive section is set to be larger than the rotation radius of the movement effect section, so that the separation distance is less than or equal to the rotation radius of the movement effect section. The thickness dimension of the rendering device can be reduced.

<Feature D group>
The invention of the following characteristic group D is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a pattern display device that displays a variable pattern when a player enters a ball entering part provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this pattern display device. By doing this, there is a game in which the degree of attention to the game is improved.

  Further, for example, by providing a production means including a light emitting portion and a movable body around the display screen, and by providing a predetermined correspondence between the production by the variable display of the design and the production by the production means, further attention is paid. An improved game machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention of the production means, the effect of the production means is limited only by operating the production means. Therefore, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention of the production means by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means.

  However, when the operation range is expanded or the operation modes are diversified with respect to the rendering means, it is expected that the configuration of the rendering means becomes complicated. In addition, in a configuration that enhances the effect of production by operating the production means, it is necessary to hold the production means in a non-operating state. For example, a dedicated member that operates independently of the production means is produced. Although the operation of the production means can be restricted by the dedicated member, the configuration of the production means becomes more complicated.

Feature D1. The first link portion (first link portion 402) and the second link portion (second link portion 403) are connected to the main body portion (main body portion 401) as a fixed link, and the first link portion and the second link portion are connected. A gaming machine in which a link mechanism is configured by connecting and to each other, and an effect device (second decoration device 233) having the link mechanism is provided,
The first link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a first shaft portion (first shaft portion 404),
The second link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a second shaft portion (second shaft portion 405) and the first link portion via the third shaft portion (third shaft portion 406). It is rotatably connected to the link part,
The first shaft portion is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion and the first link portion,
The second shaft portion is a slide shaft portion that is slidable along the main body portion or the second link portion,
The production device is
The gaming machine includes at least one of the first link section and the second link section, and the first link section and the second link section rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body section. A moving effect part (rotation effecting part 403b) capable of moving to an effect position (effect position PB2) that is visible from the front and a retracted position (retract position PB1) retracted from the effect position;
A first displacement portion (regulating hook portion 515 of the rotation regulating member 511) that is displaced along with the rotation of the first link portion;
A second displacing portion (a rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493) that is displaced along with the rotation of the second link portion;
Has
The first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are caught by each other when the movement rendering portion is in the retracted position, so that the first link portion is oriented in a direction in which the movement rendering portion moves to the rendering position. And, the game machine characterized in that the rotation of the second link portion is restricted, and the rotation restriction of each link portion is released by releasing the mutual hooking.

  With the feature D1, since the rendering device has the link mechanism, the movement range of the movement rendering unit is expanded and the movement rendering is performed by rotating the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other. It is possible to diversify the operation mode of the unit. Therefore, by moving the movement effect part to the effect position, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movement effect part.

  Here, there is a concern that the structure of the link mechanism may become complicated due to a plurality of members including at least the first link portion and the second link portion operating in conjunction with each other. In addition, when a dedicated member that operates independently of the first link portion and the second link portion is added to the link mechanism in order to restrict the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion, the configuration of the link mechanism becomes more complicated. Will end up. Moreover, in order to operate the exclusive member in a manner different from that of the first link portion and the second link portion, it is necessary to operate the exclusive member by a drive portion different from the drive portion for operating these link portions. The operation control of the mechanism also becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D1, the first displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion and the second displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the second link portion are caught by each other. Therefore, the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion can be restricted without attaching a dedicated member that operates independently of these link portions to the link mechanism. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration and operation of the link mechanism from becoming complicated.

  Moreover, since the first displacement part and the second displacement part are in a state of being caught by each other when the movement effecting part moves to the retracted position, the first link part and the first displacement part in the direction in which the movement effecting part moves to the effecting position. 2 It is possible to regulate that the link portion unintentionally rotates. For this reason, it is possible to limit the movement of the movement effecting unit to the effect position, and it is possible to increase the expectation of the game for the game by moving the movement effecting unit.

  As described above, it is possible to preferably improve the degree of attention to the effect produced by the link mechanism.

Feature D2. The production device is
A moving member (rack 493) that slides together with the second shaft portion with the rotation of the second link portion;
A rotating body (a rotation restricting member 511) that rotates with the rotation of the first link portion;
Has
The first displacement portion is provided on the rotating body, and is displaced with the rotation of the rotating body.
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second displacement portion is provided on the moving member and is displaced as the moving member slides.

  With the feature D2, since it is possible to linearly move the second displacement portion in accordance with the moving direction of the second shaft portion, compared to the configuration in which both the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion perform curved movement, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are caught by each other at a position where the movement trajectory of the first displacement portion and the movement trajectory of the second displacement portion intersect.

  Here, the position where the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are easily caught is a position where the angle at which the movement trajectory of the first displacement portion and the movement trajectory of the second displacement portion intersect is approximately 90 degrees, and When both the movement loci of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are both curved, for example, the position of the movement trajectory and the angle of the movement trajectory at that position for each of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion. It is necessary to calculate the position where the movement locus of the first displacement portion and the movement locus of the second displacement portion are orthogonal to each other. Therefore, there is a concern that the work of setting the relative operation mode of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the movement locus of the second displacement portion is linear, the movement locus of the second displacement portion has the same angle in all portions. In this case, the position of the movement locus and the angle of the movement locus at that position need to correspond to each other only for the second displacement portion, so that the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion respectively move. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the loci intersect with each other at positions orthogonal to each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the work of setting the positional relationship between the rotating body and the moving member and the relative operation mode of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion from becoming complicated.

Feature D3. The movement rendering unit moves toward the retracted position when the first link unit and the second link unit rotate in a direction in which the second shaft unit moves away from the first shaft unit. ,
The first link portion is arranged at a position separated from the first shaft portion in a direction intersecting a direction in which the first shaft portion and the third shaft portion are arranged, and the first link portion is rotated. Has a link displacement portion (bulging connection portion 517) that is displaced in accordance with
The rotating body is provided at a position separated from the rotating shaft portion (restricting shaft portion 513) of the rotating body, and has a rotating displacement portion (restricting connection portion 516) that is displaced as the rotating body rotates. And
The link displacing portion and the rotation displacing portion are coupled by a coupling member (coupling member 512), so that the rotating body rotates with the rotation of the first link portion. The game machine described in Feature D2.

  According to the feature D3, since the rotating body is connected to the first link portion via the connecting member, the rotating body can be arranged at a position separated from the first shaft portion. In this case, it is possible to arrange the first displacement portion at a position overlapping the movement range of the movement member, so that the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are hooked to each other at the position where the respective movement restrictions intersect. Can easily be realized.

Feature D4. In the rotating body, the rotating shaft portion and the rotating displacement portion are arranged along the arrangement direction of the first shaft portion and the link displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the connecting member extends along a direction in which the first shaft portion and the rotating shaft portion are arranged.

  According to the feature D4, the displacement amount of the link displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion can be directly converted into the displacement amount of the first displacement portion, so that the rotation amount of the first link portion can be changed. It is possible to prevent the configuration for displacing the first displacement portion from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. The production device is
A slide drive unit (link drive unit 442) for slidingly moving the second shaft unit to rotate the second link unit with respect to the main body unit;
And a pinion gear (pinion gear 492) that rotates with the driving of the slide drive unit,
The moving member is a rack having a plurality of teeth that mesh with the teeth of the pinion,
The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein the second displacement portion is provided at an end portion of the rack on a side of the first shaft portion in a moving direction of the rack.

  According to the feature D5, since the rack that moves linearly is used as the moving member, it is possible to easily realize the configuration in which the second displacement portion linearly moves. Moreover, since the driving force of the slide drive unit is applied to each of the second shaft unit and the second displacement unit via the rack, for example, in a configuration in which a dedicated member for displacing the second displacement unit is provided. In comparison, it is possible to suppress the configuration of the rendering device from becoming complicated. Further, since the driving force of the rack slide driving unit for slidingly moving the second shaft portion is applied to the rack via the pinion gear, the driving force of the driving force is changed when the rotational movement of the sliding driving unit is converted into the linear movement of the rack. Loss is less likely to occur.

Feature D6. The moving member is
A first pushing portion (bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement rendering unit moves to the rendering position;
A second pushing portion (ceiling surface 495a of the hooking hole 495) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement rendering portion returns to the retracted position;
Has
The second shaft portion is movable along the moving direction of the second shaft portion between the first pushing portion and the second pushing portion,
The moving member releases the hooking position (lowermost position LB2) in which the first displacing portion and the second displacing portion are hooked to each other, and the hooking between the first displacing portion and the second displacing portion is released. To the hook release position (lock release position LB3), and when the movement effecting unit moves to the retreat position by pressing the second shaft portion with the second pushing portion, the second push portion moves to the hooking position. And moving in a direction in which the second pushing portion is separated from the second shaft portion within a range in which the first pushing portion does not push the second shaft portion when the movement effecting portion is in the retracted position. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D2 to D5, wherein the gaming machine moves to the hook release position.

  According to the characteristic D6, when the movement rendering unit moves from the retracted position toward the rendering position, the operation of releasing the catch between the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion and the first pushing portion of the moving member are moved to the first position. The operation of starting rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion by pressing the two shaft portions is sequentially performed at timings that do not overlap. Therefore, the peak value of the driving force required to perform each operation can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which these operations are performed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a smaller rated torque as the peak value is reduced, as the driving unit that applies the driving force to the first link unit and the second link unit. As a result, the cost burden can be reduced.

  Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein a moving direction of the second shaft portion with respect to the moving member is the same as a moving direction of the moving member.

  According to the characteristic D7, since the moving direction of the moving member and the moving direction of the second shaft portion are the same, the first moving portion is moved to the first moving portion after the catching of the first displacing portion and the second displacing portion is released. In a situation where the pushing portion pushes the second shaft portion, it is difficult for the first pushing portion to lose the force for pushing the second shaft portion. For this reason, the moving speed of the second shaft portion can be increased, whereby high-speed movement of the movement effecting portion can be realized, and the effect of the movement effecting portion can be enhanced.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, wherein the rotating body is provided on a side opposite to the first link portion and the second link portion with the moving member interposed therebetween. ..

  According to Feature D8, even if the rotating body is arranged at a position overlapping the moving member, the first link portion, and the second link portion in the thickness direction of the rendering device, the rotating body still has the first link portion and the second link. It is possible to avoid hindering the rotation of the section.

Feature D9. A biasing means for biasing at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion so as to rotate the first link portion and the second link portion in a direction in which the movement rendering portion moves to the rendering position. Equipped with a biasing means (spring member 451),
The first displacing portion and the second displacing portion are hooked to each other to restrict the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion against the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, since the biasing force of the biasing means is applied to the first link portion and the second link portion, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the movement rendering unit from the retracted position to the rendering position. Here, in the configuration in which the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link portion and the second link portion, there is a concern that these link portions may unintentionally rotate due to the urging force, but the movement rendering unit In the retracted position, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are hooked, so that the rotation of each link portion is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect produced by the movement effecting unit from being lowered by unintentionally moving the movement effecting unit at the retracted position toward the effecting position.

  The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), game ball launching means launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the shot. A ball passage (guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game component arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passage portion (general winning) of each game component. A gaming machine that gives a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through the mouth 61).

  Rotating type gaming machines such as slot machines: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variable display of the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and the variation of the symbol starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating device for stop or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Belt-type gaming machine using a ball: Variable display means for displaying the final stop of the symbol row after variably displaying the symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the starting operation means, and stopped. Due to the operation of the operating means or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the special game state advantageous to the player (bonus A loading device that is configured to generate a game or the like) and further includes a ball tray to perform a loading process for loading a game ball from the ball tray, and a dispensing device that dispenses the game ball to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective by throwing in a game ball.

  10 ... Pachinko machine as gaming machine, 231 ... Unit main body as attachment object, 232 ... First decoration device as link device, 233 ... Second decoration device as production device, 241 ... Main body part, 242 ... First link Part, 243 ... Second link part, 243b ... Movement effecting part, 244 ... First shaft part, 245 ... Second shaft part, 246 ... Third shaft part, 261, ... Intermediate arm, 262 ... Main body side shaft part, 263 ... Link side shaft portion, 264 ... First arm portion, 265 ... Second arm portion, 265a ... Arm elongated hole as arm guide portion, 266 ... Intermediate shaft portion, 269 ... Reverse rotation stopper as reverse rotation restricting portion, 271 ... Projection part, 281 ... 1st drive part as expansion-contraction drive part, 282 ... 2nd drive part, 291 ... Spring member as biasing means, 301 ... 1st transmission part as arm transmission means, 332 ... Pinion gear 333 ... Rack as moving member, 335 ... Hook hole, 335a ... Ceiling surface as first pushing portion, 335b ... Bottom surface as second pushing portion, 401 ... Main body portion, 402 ... First link portion, 403 ... Second Link part, 403a ... Link part body 403a, 403b as effect arm ... Rotation effect part as movement effect part, 404 ... First shaft part, 405 ... Second shaft part as arm shaft part, 406 ... Third shaft part , 407 ... Production shaft part, 442 ... Link drive part as slide drive part and arm drive part, 451 ... Spring member as urging means, 465 ... Top cover as second restricting part constituting reverse rotation restricting means Body, 469 ... Reverse rotation stopper as a first regulation portion constituting reverse rotation regulation means, 475 ... Performance driving portion, 476 ... Performance transmission portion, 492 ... Pinion gear, 493 ... Moving member Rack, 495 ... Hook hole, 495a ... Ceiling surface as second pushing portion, 495b ... Bottom surface as first pushing portion, 511 ... Rotation restricting member as rotating body, 512 ... Connecting member, 513 ... Regulation shaft portion as a moving shaft portion, 515 ... Regulation hook portion as a first displacement portion, 516 ... Regulation connection portion as a rotational displacement portion, 517 ... Swelling connection portion as a link displacement portion, 521 ... Second displacement A rack receiving portion as a unit, LB2 ... a lowest position as a hooking position, LB3 ... a lock releasing position as a hooking releasing position, PA1 .. Retracted position of rotation effect unit 403b, PB2 ... Effect position of rotation effect unit 403b.

Claims (1)

A first link part and a second link part are connected to the main body part, and a linking mechanism including the first link part and the second link part allows the movement effecting part to be visually recognized from the front of the game machine and the effect position. A gaming machine configured to move from a production position to a retracted position,
When the first link unit is operated, it is possible to move the movement rendering unit from one of the rendering position and the retracted position toward the other of the rendering position and the retracted position. When the 2 link unit is operated, it is possible to move the movement rendering unit from one of the rendering position and the retracted position toward the other of the rendering position and the retracted position,
A first drive unit for operating the first link unit;
A second drive unit for operating the second link unit;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

Images